3. 《大般涅槃经》的注释巴利
3. Mahāparinibbānasuttavaṇṇanā
131 131. 因为它是应当被恭敬的,又因为舍弃了佛陀的成就而运转,而且它是伟大的般涅槃,所以叫“大般涅槃”;因为断尽了随眠烦恼,依止于伟大的烦恼灭尽而运转的般涅槃,也叫“大般涅槃”;由极长的时间或极广的功德聚所成就的般涅槃,也叫“大般涅槃”;因为伟大、因为诸界的众多而般涅槃,也叫“大般涅槃”;从广大的世间出离而般涅槃,也叫“大般涅槃”;因为佛陀的戒等功德是一切世间所不共的,所以伟大佛陀、世尊的般涅槃,也叫“大般涅槃”;在伟大的教法已经安立时般涅槃,也叫“大般涅槃”。因此,佛陀世尊的般涅槃被称为“大般涅槃”,与此相关的经就是《大般涅槃经》。
秃鹫在这里栖息,所以叫“秃鹫”;这里有峰顶,所以叫“秃鹫峰”;或者像秃鹫,所以叫“秃鹫”,此山有峰顶,所以叫“秃鹫峰山”。经文里说的“秃鹫”等就是指这个。
“Abhiyātukāmo”这里,“abhi”这个前缀是征服的意思,像在“abhivijānātu”等词里那样,所以解释为“为了征服而想去”。
“Vajjirājāno”:因为“这些人应当被避开”等说法流传开来,而得名为“Vajjī”的诸王,或者说是Vajji国的诸王。而Vajji国的“Vajji”这个称呼,应当依据居住在那里的王子来理解。
“以王威”:随顺王者身份的自性。那种自性,对于这些共和制的王来说,因为彼此和合而在世间显现,并且长久持续,所以说“讲述了和合的状态”。
“Anubhāva”:随顺地使具足者增长、壮大,所以叫“anubhāva”;anubhāva就是“ānubhāva”,即威势。那种威势,因为象、马等交通工具具足,又因为在其中善巧修习而在世间显现,所以说“以这些……讲述了”。
“Tāḷacchiggalena”:就是钥匙孔。
“Asanaṃ”:就是箭。
“Atipātayissanti”:就是令越过。
“Poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ”:就是箭翎接着箭翎,把后一箭做成跟随前一箭翎部位置。
“Avirādhitaṃ”:就是没有失误。
“Ucchindissāmi”:就是以拔根的方式断除家族血脉。
“Aya”:是增长、增进,与它相反就是“anaya”,所以说“这是衰损的名称”。
“Vikkhipati”:就是从远处投掷,意思是移开。巴利
131. Pūjanīyabhāvato , buddhasampadañca pahāya pavattatā mahantañca taṃ parinibbānañcāti mahāparinibbānaṃ; savāsanappahānato mahantaṃ kilesakkhayaṃ nissāya pavattaṃ parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahatā kālena mahatā vā guṇarāsinā sādhitaṃ parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahantabhāvāya, dhātūnaṃ bahubhāvāya parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahato lokato nissaṭaṃ parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; sabbalokāsādhāraṇattā buddhānaṃ sīlādiguṇehi mahato buddhassa bhagavato parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānaṃ; mahati sāsane patiṭṭhite parinibbānantipi mahāparinibbānanti buddhassa bhagavato parinibbānaṃ vuccati, tappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suttaṃ mahāparinibbānasuttaṃ. Gijjhā ettha vasantīti gijjhaṃ, gijjhaṃ kūṭaṃ etassāti gijjhakūṭo, gijjhaṃ viya vā gijjhaṃ, kūṭaṃ, taṃ etassāti gijjhakūṭo, pabbato, tasmiṃ gijjhakūṭe. Tenāha ‘‘gijjhā’’tiādi. Abhiyātukāmoti ettha abhi-saddo abhibhavanattho, ‘‘abhivijānātū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.244; 3.85; ma. ni. 3.256) viyāti āha ‘‘abhibhavanatthāya yātukāmo’’ti. Vajjirājānoti ‘‘vajjetabbā ime’’tiādito pavattaṃ vacanaṃ upādāya ‘‘vajjī’’ti laddhanāmā rājāno, vajjīraṭṭhassa vā rājāno vajjirājāno. Vajjiraṭṭhassa pana vajjisamaññā tannivāsirājakumāravasena veditabbā. Rājiddhiyāti rājabhāvānugatena sabhāvena. So pana sabhāvo nesaṃ gaṇarājūnaṃ mitho sāmaggiyā loke pākaṭo, ciraṭṭhāyī ca ahosīti ‘‘samaggabhāvaṃ kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Anu anu taṃsamaṅgino bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti anubhāvo, anubhāvo eva ānubhāvo, patāpo, so pana nesaṃ patāpo hatthiassādivāhanasampattiyā, tattha ca susikkhitabhāvena loke pākaṭo jātoti ‘‘etena…pe… kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tāḷacchiggalenāti kuñcikāchiddena. Asananti saraṃ. Atipātayissantīti atikkāmenti. Poṅkhānupoṅkhanti poṅkhassa anupoṅkhaṃ, purimasarassa poṅkhapadānugatapoṅkhaṃ itaraṃ saraṃ katvāti attho. Avirādhitanti avirajjhitaṃ. Ucchindissāmīti ummūlanavasena kulasantatiṃ chindissāmi. Ayanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ ayo, tappaṭikkhepena anayoti āha ‘‘avaḍḍhiyā etaṃ nāma’’nti. Vikkhipatīti vidūrato khipati, apanetīti attho.
“恒河那边”指的是恒河附近。“车港村”指的是车港村。“命令”就是命令在施行。而“半由旬”是就住在这个港口半由旬范围内的人说的。“在那里”指的是在那个港口里。“生起了强烈愤恨”指的是生起了强烈的愤怒。巴利
Gaṅgāyanti gaṅgāsamīpe. Paṭṭanagāmanti sakaṭapaṭṭanagāmaṃ. Āṇāti āṇā vattati. Aḍḍhayojananti ca tasmiṃ paṭṭane aḍḍhayojanaṭṭhānavāsino sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tatrāti tasmiṃ paṭṭane. Balavāghātajātoti uppannabalavakodho.
“Me”就是“我的”。“Gatena”就是通过行走。巴利
Meti mayhaṃ. Gatenāti gamanena.
解说国王不退失的法则巴利
Rājaaparihāniyadhammavaṇṇanā
134 没有冷或热:在那个时候,凭借诸佛的福德威力,气候在任何时候都是冷暖适中的,就是针对这个情况才那样说的。“Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātā”是常集会。为了说明这种常集会的状态,才说了“每天”等话。“Sannipātabahulā”是多数时间都在集会。“Vosāna”是收敛。“Yāvakīva”这是一个词,表示不定的限量,这里指的是时间,所以说“凡多少时间”。为了通过反面的方式说明前面所说的“唯有增长”等意义,才说了“如果不常集会……”等话。“Ākulā”是混浊、不清净。“Bhijjitvā”是从和合的团体中分裂开来,各自分散。巴利
134.Sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā natthi, tāyaṃ velāyaṃ puññānubhāvena buddhānaṃ sabbakālaṃ samasītuṇhāva utu hoti, taṃ sandhāya tathā vuttaṃ. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti niccasannipātā, taṃ pana niccasannipātataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘divasassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sannipātabahulāti pacurasannipātā. Vosānanti saṅkocaṃ. ‘‘Yāvakīva’’nti ekamevetaṃ padaṃ aniyamato parimāṇavācī, kālo cettha adhippetoti āha ‘‘yattakaṃ kāla’’nti. ‘‘Vuddhiyevā’’tiādinā vuttamatthaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiṇhaṃ asannipatantā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ākulāti khubhitā, na pasannā. Bhijjitvāti vaggabandhato vibhajja visuṃ visuṃ hutvā.
集会鼓,就是宣告集会的鼓。已吃一半,就是主人已经吃过了。正在消退,就是在衰减、退失。巴利
Sannipātabheriyāti sannipātārocanabheriyā. Aḍḍhabhuttā vāti sāmibhuttā ca. Osīdamāneti hāyamāne.
“先前未造作”是指过去没有产生过。“税”是指带着货物上路的人,在山岭、渡口、村口等地,应该交给国王差役的那一份。“力税”是指从成熟庄稼等收成中,按六分之一、七分之一等比例征收所得的税。“罚金”是指按罪过轻重应当收取的财产处罚,比如十迦哈巴那、二十迦哈巴那之类。“跋耆法”是指跋耆国的王法。“能够奉事、能够侍奉”是指能够服侍、能够照料。现在,为了详细说明在未制立、已制立等情形中,遮止这些做法会带来的过患和利益,所以说了“对他们,未制立……”等话。巴利
Pubbe akatanti pubbe anibbattaṃ. Suṅkanti bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā gacchantehi pabbatakhaṇḍa nadītitthagāmadvārādīsu rājapurisānaṃ dātabbabhāgaṃ. Balinti nipphannasassādito chabhāgaṃ, sattabhāgantiādinā laddhakaraṃ. Daṇḍanti dasavīsatikahāpaṇādikaṃ aparādhānurūpaṃ gahetabbadhanadaṇḍaṃ. Vajjidhammanti vajjirājadhammaṃ. Idāni apaññattapaññāpanādīsu tappaṭikkhepa ādīnavānisaṃse vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ apaññatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Pāricariyakkhamāti upaṭṭhānakkhamā.
因为门第、财富、权势等而具有很大的分量和尺度,所以叫大臣;他们被安置在法律论典所规定的判决中,就是裁决大臣,即属于他们的。给予,就是交出。如果他们认为“这是贼”,如果他们有这种想。因为害怕恶行,自己什么都不说。从事被称为刑罚论的法律事务的人,就是法律执行者,也就是被称为“法住者”的人。持经者,就是持法律经的人,他们被指定安置在这样的法律裁决中。出生在辗转相传的八大家族中、远离偏私行事的八位长老,就是八族中人。巴利
Kulabhogaissariyādivasena mahatī mattā pamāṇaṃ etesanti mahāmattā, nītisatthavihite vinicchaye ṭhapitā mahāmattā vinicchayamahāmattā, tesaṃ. Dentīti niyyātenti. Sace coroti evaṃsaññino sace honti. Pāpabhīrutāya attanā kiñci avatvā. Daṇḍanītisaññite vohāre niyuttāti vohārikā, ye ‘‘dhammaṭṭhā’’ti vuccanti. Suttadharā nītisuttadharā , īdise vohāravinicchaye niyametvā ṭhapitā. Paramparābhatesu aṭṭhasu kulesu jātā agatigamanaviratā aṭṭhamahallakapurisā aṭṭhakulikā.
恭敬是指带来利益。先建立起尊重的态度,就是一再地建立起“这些人是我们的尊长”这样的尊重之心。敬重是指尊敬他们,而这种尊敬是以他们内心欢喜为前提的,所以说“以心意喜爱他们”。敬礼是指躬身礼拜。显示是指以“这些是我们的祖父、外祖父”等说法,保持谦卑的心态,表现出尊崇的样子。保持连结是指使关系不断绝而连结、协调。巴利
Sakkāranti upakāraṃ. Garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvāti ‘‘ime amhākaṃ garuno’’ti tattha garubhāvaṃ pati pati upaṭṭhapetvā. Mānentīti sammānenti, taṃ pana sammānanaṃ tesu nesaṃ attamanatāpubbakanti āha ‘‘manena piyāyantī’’ti. Nipaccakāranti paṇipātaṃ. Dassentīti ‘‘ime amhākaṃ pitāmahā , mātāmahā’’tiādinā nīcacittā hutvā garucittākāraṃ dassenti. Sandhāretunti sambandhaṃ avicchinnaṃ katvā ghaṭetuṃ.
所谓“强制的方式”,就是用强力压服的方式。虽然因为增长是值得尊崇的,所以经文说成“增长与退减”,但它的含义还是要按照前面讲的次第来理解;或者说,因为经典里说“只应期待增长,不应有退减”,所以就依照这个次第说成“增长与退减”。巴利
Pasayhākārassāti balakkārassa. Kāmaṃ vuddhiyā pūjanīyatāya ‘‘vuddhihāniyo’’ti vuttaṃ, attho pana vuttānukkameneva yojetabbo, pāḷiyaṃ vā yasmā ‘‘vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tadanukkamena ‘‘vuddhihāniyo’’ti vuttaṃ.
恶业还没得到成熟的机会,或者它的果报还没有现前的时候,天神的干扰也无隙可乘;可是一旦得到机会,天神的干扰就有了可乘之机,所以说“未生起的……令增长”。从这里也能理解“未生起的乐”这句话的意思。应当知道,天神在战场上帮忙,是通过让己方军队看起来变成两倍、三倍,以及显现可怕景象等方式来体现的。巴利
Vipaccituṃ aladdhokāse pāpakamme, tassa kammassa vipāke vā anavasarova devatopasaggo, tasmiṃ pana laddhokāse siyā devatopasaggassa avasaroti āha ‘‘anuppannaṃ…pe… vaḍḍhentī’’ti. Eteneva anuppannaṃ sukhanti etthāpi attho veditabbo. ‘‘Balakāyassa diguṇatiguṇatādassanaṃ, paṭibhayabhāvadassana’’nti evaṃ ādinā devatānaṃ saṅgāmasīse sahāyatā veditabbā.
不可意:就是不可爱、不合意。由于障碍:因为遮止、阻挡。对于某法不曾离开、与法相应,这里就称为“法的”。为了猎杀鹿、野猪等,驱赶狗等进入山林行走,这叫围猎、猎鹿;从事这种行业的人,或者驱赶、带领猎物的人,就叫驱猎者,也就是以猎杀鹿等为生的人。他问心的活动。因为心的活动在世间,确实是通过身和语的造作而明显表现出来、成为显明的。巴利
Anicchitanti aniṭṭhaṃ. Āvaraṇatoti nisedhanato. Yassa dhammato anapetā dhammiyāti idha ‘‘dhammikā’’ti vuttā. Migasūkarādighātāya sunakhādīnaṃ kaḍḍhitvā vanacaraṇaṃ vājo, migavā, tattha niyuttā, te vā vājenti nentīti vājikā, migavadhacārino. Cittappavattiṃ pucchati. Kāyikavācasikapayogena hi sā loke pākaṭā pakāsabhūtāti.
135 因为具有天神居所的性质,又能让世间人心生敬重,所以就成了塔庙。巴利
135. Devāyatanabhāvena citattā, lokassa cittīkāraṭṭhānattā ca cetiyaṃ ahosi.
“不应做”是指:绝不可以用随心所欲的方式去做任何事。而所谓随心所欲,就是按照手里拿着的东西去做,所以他说“不应执取”,意思就是这个。“以面对面战斗”是指以正面、直接的方式交战。为了说明“奉承和亲自给予”,才说了“足够”等话。离间在这里也只是一种手段,所以说“除了互相离间”。至于战争不是手段,前面早已说明了。“这话”指的就是“除了奉承,除了互相离间”这句话。从世尊的这番话——“只要……不退失”——中得到了方法,也就是得到了途径。巴利
Kāmaṃkāravasena kiñcipi na karaṇīyāti akaraṇīyā. Kāmaṃkāro pana hatthagatakaraṇavasenāti āha ‘‘aggahetabbāti attho’’ti. Abhimukhayuddhenāti abhimukhaṃ ujukameva saṅgāmakaraṇena. Upalāpanaṃ sāmaṃ dānañcāti dassetuṃ ‘‘ala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Bhedopi idha upāyo evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatra mithubhedāyā’’ti. Yuddhassa pana anupāyatā pageva pakāsitā. Idanti ‘‘aññatra upalāpanāya, aññatra mithubhedā’’ti ca idaṃ vacanaṃ. Kathāya nayaṃ labhitvāti ‘‘yāvakīvañca…pe… no parihānī’’ti imāya bhagavato kathāya nayaṃ upāyaṃ labhitvā.
“出于慈悯”,就是出于对跋耆王族的护念。“他的”,是指世尊的。巴利
Anukampāyāti vajjirājesu anuggahena. Assāti bhagavato.
“如何”是指与跋耆人一起时该怎么打的作战讨论。“我要把它弄直”意思是:把敌对的国王们带来,通过改变城墙和护城河的样子,使他们变得顺服。巴利
Kathanti vajjīhi saddhiṃ kātabbayuddhakathaṃ. Ujuṃ karissāmīti paṭirājāno ānetvā pākāraparikhānaṃ aññathābhāvāpādanena ujubhāvaṃ karissāmi.
“已立足之德”是指已稳固立足于师长的德行。这里的文意衔接是:离车族人想:“让有权势的人去集会吧,我们是无权无势的人,去那里能做什么呢?”因此他们没有去集会。“让勇士们集会吧”这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Patiṭṭhitaguṇoti patiṭṭhitācariyaguṇo. Issarā sannipatantu, mayaṃ anissarā, tattha gantvā kiṃ karissāmāti licchavino na sannipatiṃsūti yojanā. Sūrā sannipatantūti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“军力鼓”是指为了作战而敲响、让军队集合起来的战鼓。巴利
Balabherinti yuddhāya balakāyassa uṭṭhānabheriṃ.
比丘不退法的解说巴利
Bhikkhuaparihāniyadhammavaṇṇanā
136 136. “为了不退失而存在”就是指不退法;或者说,依靠这些法不会退失,所以叫不退法。不过,因为这些不退法本身就是造成不退失的因素,所以才说“能作不退”。又因为这些法是造成退失之法的直接对治,所以又说它们是“增长的因”。由于世尊的开示能一层又一层地照亮智慧之光,驱散众生心中的黑暗,并且把应当阐明的内容像掌中的余甘子一样清清楚楚地呈现出来,因此说“千月之光……我将宣说……”巴利
136. Aparihānāya hitāti aparihāniyā, na parihāyanti etehīti vā aparihāniyā, te pana yasmā aparihāniyā kārakā nāma honti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘aparihānikare’’ti. Yasmā pana te parihānikarānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhabhūtā, tasmā āha ‘‘vuddhihetubhūte’’ti. Yasmā bhagavato desanā uparūpari ñāṇālokaṃ pasādentī sattānaṃ hadayandhakāraṃ vidhamati, pakāsetabbe ca atthe hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya suṭṭhutaraṃ pākaṭe katvā dasseti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘candasahassaṃ…pe… kathayissāmī’’ti.
世尊心想:“当我在那位婆罗门面前讲述跋耆人经常集会等做法时,这些不退法的谈论还是导向轮回、依附于流转的;但在我的教法中,应当讲的是与之类似、却能导向出离、依附于还灭的谈论——依靠这样的谈论,在我般涅槃之后,我的教法才能长久地延续下去、久住世间。”因此,世尊召集比丘们,为他们开示不退法,并以同样的方式宣说。所以注释中说“这与《跋耆七法》所说相似”。为了把略说的义理详细展开,注释接着说“而在这部经中也是如此……”等。其中,“从那里……”等语,是指从其他方面传来的教法中所记述的那段话。因为那时精舍的结界范围混乱不清,所以布萨与自恣都停止了。巴利
Yasmā bhagavā ‘‘tassa brāhmaṇassa sammukhā vajjīnaṃ abhiṇhasannipātādipaṭipattiṃ kathentoyeva ayaṃ aparihāniyakathā aniyyānikā vaṭṭanissitā, mayhaṃ pana sāsane tathārūpī kathā kathetabbā, sā hoti niyyānikā vivaṭṭanissitā, yāya sāsanaṃ mayhaṃ parinibbānato parampi addhaniyaṃ assa ciraṭṭhitika’’nti cintesi, tasmā bhikkhū sannipātāpetvā tesaṃ aparihāniye dhamme desento teneva niyāmena desesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ vajjisattake vuttasadisamevā’’ti. Evaṃ saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘idhāpi cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘tato’’tiādi disāsu āgatasāsane vuttaṃ taṃ kathanaṃ. Vihārasīmā ākulā yasmā, tasmā uposathapavāraṇā ṭhitā.
“消沉者”是指从经文本身来说、从含义上来说都在败坏的人。“提策者”是指通过让他熟练以及通过阐释含义,来给予扶持、鼓励的人。巴利
Olīyamānakoti pāḷito, atthato ca vinassamāno. Ukkhipāpentāti paguṇabhāvakaraṇena, atthasaṃvaṇṇanena ca paggaṇhantā.
在舍卫城的比丘们那样,应当让他发露忏悔波逸提罪(详细事缘见《波罗夷》565)。像跋耆子们那样,通过说明十件事(详细事缘见《小品》446)。他们解释说:“‘Gihigatāni’就是与在家人相关的事。在在家人中流传、被他们知道的事,就是在家人所涉事。它只在有烟的时候存在,所以叫‘烟火时存’(dhūmakālika),因为火葬柴堆的烟消散之后,它就不再持续了。”巴利
Sāvatthiyaṃ bhikkhū viya pācittiyaṃ desāpetabboti (pārā. 565 vitthāravatthu). Vajjiputtakā viya dasavatthudīpanena (cūḷava. 446 vitthāravatthu). ‘‘Gihigatānīti gihipaṭisaṃyuttānī’’ti vadanti. Gihīsu gatāni, tehi ñātāni gihigatāni. Dhūmakālo etassāti dhūmakālikaṃ citakadhūmavūpasamato paraṃ appavattanato.
已经达到坚固:在教法中得到坚固、不退转的状态。由构成长老的因素:指能成就长老身份的戒等功德,也就是无学法。多夜:指出家之后经历了许多夜晚。在戒等功德中站稳,就是在教法中成为引导者,所以说“在三学中精勤修行”。巴利
Thirabhāvappattāti sāsane thirabhāvaṃ anivattitabhāvaṃ upagatā. Therakārakehīti therabhāvasādhakehi sīlādiguṇehi asekkhadhammehi. Bahū rattiyoti pabbajitā hutvā bahū rattiyo jānanti. Sīlādiguṇesu patiṭṭhāpanameva sāsane pariṇāyakatāti āha ‘‘tīsu sikkhāsu pavattentī’’ti.
他们不给教诫,因为对方不是能接受教法的根器。“传统之论”,是指从历代老师一脉传下来的、阐明正确修行之道的法义开示。“核心法门”,是指通过达到止、观、道、果而成为精髓的法义体系,比如《觉支善巧经》《无上清凉经》《增上心经》等经典。巴利
Ovādaṃ na denti abhājanabhāvato. Paveṇīkathanti ācariyaparamparābhataṃ sammāpaṭipattidīpanaṃ dhammakathaṃ. Sārabhūtaṃ dhammapariyāyanti samathavipassanāmaggaphalasampāpanena sārabhūtaṃ bojjhaṅgakosallaanuttarasītībhāvaadhicittasuttādidhammatantiṃ.
“Punabbhavadānaṃ”这个词是省略了后一半的说法,指的就是“后有”。至于“其他者”,是指那些不被条件所支配、不带着贪求物质利益的眼光的人,他们不会落入渴爱的掌控。巴利
Punabbhavadānaṃ punabbhavo uttarapadalopena. Itareti ye na paccayavasikā na āmisacakkhukā, te na gacchanti taṇhāya vasaṃ.
“在阿兰若处”是指森林地带、属于森林范围的住处。难道不管在哪里,渴爱都有过失吗?针对这个问难,经文说“因为在村落附近的坐卧具……”等等。借此说明:就像在“对无上解脱生起渴望”那里所说的情爱等一样,在阿兰若处的坐卧具中,那种有所依恋的状态,也是属于应当修习的部分。巴利
Āraññakesūti araññabhāgesu araññapariyāpannesu. Nanu yattha katthacipi taṇhā sāvajjā evāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘gāmantasenāsanesu hī’’tiādi, tena ‘‘anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato’’ti ettha vuttasinehādayo viya āraññakesu senāsanesu sālayatā sevitabbapakkhiyā evāti dasseti.
“自己”就是亲自的意思。这里是在说明:有些人没有受到别人劝请,完全出于自己的本性,会期待那些还没到来的清净比丘前来,也期待已经到来的比丘能安乐地安住。通过这种方式,就是依照这种修行实践。“持取未持之法”是指受持还没有领纳的教理法义。“作已持之诵读”是指对已经受持的法义好好地进行思惟;因为“诵读”这个词本身就含有思惟的意思。巴利
Attanāvāti sayameva, tena parehi anussāhitānaṃ saraseneva anāgatānaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āgamanaṃ, āgatānañca phāsuvihāraṃ paccāsisantīti dasseti. Iminā nīhārenāti imāya paṭipattiyā. Aggahitadhammaggahaṇanti aggahitassa pariyattidhammassa uggahaṇaṃ. Gahitasajjhāyakaraṇanti uggahitassa suṭṭhu atthacintanaṃ. Cintanattho hi sajjhāyasaddo.
“来”就是前往。“坐”就是铺好座位等之后坐下来。巴利
Entīti upagacchanti. Nisīdanti āsanapaññāpanādinā.
137 137. 以应当欢喜投入其中的意义,所以事务就叫“乐处”。乐于事务,不是热衷于经教事务或住处事务,而是乐于事务、专心投入,也就是以全然投入的状态一再地勤于其中。所谓“应作之事”,就是比丘们各自该做的各种大小事务,比如料理袈裟等。因此说“即如……”等等。“支撑”,指做双层、三层等,因为它是支撑第一层等的原因,所以这样说。如果是这样,那为什么又说这种“乐于事务”是被禁止的呢?回答说:“因为有一类人……”等等。巴利
137. Āramitabbaṭṭhena kammaṃ ārāmo. Kamme ratā, na ganthadhure, vāsadhure vāti kammaratā, anuyuttāti tapparabhāvena punappunaṃ pasutā. Iti kātabbakammanti taṃ taṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kātabbaṃ uccāvacakammaṃ cīvaravicāraṇādi. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathida’’ntiādi. Upatthambhananti dupaṭṭatipaṭṭādikaraṇaṃ. Tañhi paṭhamapaṭalādīnaṃ upatthambhanakāraṇattā tathā vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ ayaṃ kammarāmatā paṭikkhittāti āha ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādi.
正在做的时候,就是指像前面所说的那样正在讲畜生论。即使并非畜生论,这里用这个限定词,是为了表明他的心完全投入在那件事上。有节制者,就是说话有分寸、有所限定的人。因为经中说:说有限度的言语。或者说少语者,就是把话限制到最少,只说绝对必须说的。而进入禅定,才是圣者的沉默。巴利
Karonto yevāti yathāvuttatiracchānakathaṃ kathentoyeva. Atiracchānakathābhāvepi tassa tattha tapparabhāvadassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇavacanaṃ. Pariyantakārīti sapariyantaṃ katvā vattā. ‘‘Pariyantavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.9, 194) hi vuttaṃ. Appabhasso vāti parimitakathoyeva ekantena kathetabbasseva kathanato. Samāpattisamāpajjanaṃ ariyo tuṇhībhāvo.
他看不到沉入睡眠的过患,就只是一直睡。不用变换姿势等方式来把它驱除掉。巴利
Niddāyatiyevāti niddokkamane anādīnavadassī niddāyatiyeva. Iriyāpathaparivattanādinā na naṃ vinodeti.
像这样与人亲密相处,就是按照前面所说的方式,与群体交往、混在一起地生活。巴利
Evaṃ saṃsaṭṭho vāti vuttanayena gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya saṃsaṭṭho eva viharati.
无戒行而又怀有恶欲,意思是:自己本来就没有戒行,却因为具有想让人称赞自己并不具备的功德的欲求,所以是恶的、低劣的欲求;这些人就叫做恶欲者。巴利
Dussīlā pāpicchā nāmāti sayaṃ nissīlā asantaguṇasambhāvanicchāya samannāgatattā pāpā lāmakā icchā etesanti pāpicchā.
因为与恶人亲密交往,所以叫恶友。因为总是和他们一起活动,所以叫恶同伴。在这当中,因为内心倾向等而对他们特别执著,所以叫恶同侣。巴利
Pāpapuggalehi mettikaraṇato pāpamittā. Tehi sadā saha pavattanena pāpasahāyā. Tattha ninnatādinā tadadhimuttatāya pāpasampavaṅkā.
138 138. 他们拥有信,所以叫“具足信”。这里说“具足信”,是指通过“能来信”之道而得到的信,也就是“能来信之信”。这种信特别殊胜,大菩萨不靠别人的教导,就能对所信的对象如实深入、坚定信解,所以说“这是一切知菩萨所具有的”。通过证悟真理而得到的信,是“证得信”,就像须罗班度等人那样。因听闻“世尊是正自觉者”等话而对佛陀等生起的净信,是“净信”,就像摩诃劫宾那王等人那样。以“确实如此”的决心投入、信受,这叫“入信”。信有两种:净信和入信。其中,净信是只要听闻就生起信心,不会被别人牵着走。入信则是深入所信的对象、领会之后,仿佛亲眼看见一样生起“确实如此”的确定。因此说“信胜解者就像婆迦梨尊者那样”。所谓“他的”,是指具备入信的人。他有惭,所以叫“有惭”;惭存在于他的心中,所以叫“有惭者”,所以说“恶……乃至……心”。对恶事感到恐惧、震惊、害怕,就是“畏怖”。巴利
138. Saddhā etesaṃ atthīti saddhāti āha ‘‘saddhāsampannā’’ti. Āgamanīyapaṭipadāya āgatasaddhā āgamanīyasaddhā, sā sātisayā mahābodhisattānaṃ paropadesena vinā saddheyyavatthuṃ aviparītato ogāhetvā adhimuccanatoti āha ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ hotī’’ti. Saccapaṭivedhato āgatasaddhā adhigamasaddhā surabandhādīnaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.118; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.suppabuddhakuṭṭhivatthu; udā. aṭṭha. 43) viya. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā buddhādīsu uppajjanakapasādo pasādasaddhā mahākappinarājādīnaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.231; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.mahākappinattheravatthu; theragā. aṭṭha. 2.mahākappinattheragāthāvaṇṇanā, vitthāro) viya. ‘‘Evameta’’nti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā saddahanavasena kappanaṃ okappanaṃ. Duvidhāpīti pasādasaddhāpi okappanasaddhāpi. Tattha pasādasaddhā aparaneyyarūpā hoti savanamattena pasīdanato. Okappanasaddhā saddheyyavatthuṃ ogāhetvā anupavisitvā ‘‘evameta’’nti paccakkhaṃ karontī viya pavattati. Tenāha ‘‘saddhādhimutto vakkalittherasadiso hotī’’ti. Tassa hīti okappanasaddhāya samannāgatassa. Hirī etassa atthīti hiri, hiri mano etesanti hirimanāti āha ‘‘pāpa…pe… cittā’’ti. Pāpato ottappenti ubbijjanti bhāyantīti ottappī.
多闻:因为听闻了经、应颂等许多教法,所以叫多闻。这里提到“闻”只是举例,因为还应当包括记持、熟悉、遍问、观察、见和审虑这些。或者说,由于这些都以闻为根本,应当知道单凭“闻”这个词就已经把它们都包含进来了。教法指三藏,因为想求得利益的人应当学它,而且它是成就现世利益等人生目标的根本。谛证悟就是对诸谛的彻底通达。那也属于多闻,因为它完成了前面所说的多闻的作用。这里所说的教法,是指能带来谛证悟的多闻,因为此处要成立的多闻者身份正是依靠这种多闻。所以,他是教法上的多闻者。这种多闻有四种,没有第五种。一切处多闻:不像依止解脱多闻等那样只是局部的,而是在三藏一切处都有多闻,因为他能造作、讲说一切义理,所以叫一切处多闻。这里所说的这些人,善巧安立于教法正法中——这教法正是行道和证悟正法的根本。巴利
Bahu sutaṃ suttageyyādi etenāti bahussuto, sutaggahaṇaṃ cettha nidassanamattaṃ dhāraṇaparicayaparipucchānupekkhanadiṭṭhinijjhānānaṃ pettha icchitabbattā. Savanamūlakattā vā tesampi taggahaṇeneva gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthakāmena pariyāpuṇitabbato, diṭṭhadhammikādipurisatthasiddhiyā pariyattabhāvato ca pariyatti, tīṇi piṭakāni. Saccappaṭivedho saccānaṃ paṭivijjhanaṃ. Tadapi bāhusaccaṃ yathāvuttabāhusaccakiccanipphattito. Pariyatti adhippetā saccapaṭivedhāvahena bāhusaccena bahussutabhāvassa idha icchitattā. Soti pariyattibahussuto. Catubbidho hoti pañcamassa pakārassa abhāvato. Sabbatthakabahussutoti nissayamuccanakabahussutādayo viya padesiko ahutvā piṭakattaye sabbatthakameva bāhusaccasabbhāvato sabbassa atthassa kāyanato kathanato sabbatthakabahussuto. Te idha adhippetā paṭipattipaṭivedhasaddhammānaṃ mūlabhūte pariyattisaddhamme suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato.
已提起的,就是已经发动起来的。为了说明这两种精进发动的区别,所以说了“其中”等话。其中,“独处者”指独自一人,意思是住在远离人群之处的人。巴利
Āraddhanti paggahitaṃ. Taṃ pana duvidhampi vīriyārambhavibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ekakāti ekākino, vūpakaṭṭhavihārinoti attho.
问过之后,就是接着向别人问。令认许的意思是:先说出“你是某某”,然后让他们回答“是的”,使他们承认,这就是它的含义。这样说是为了显示:对于能够忆念久远以前所做之事等、具备正念与智慧的人,他们不用费多大力气就能圆满念觉支的修习,所以说“是针对这样的比丘”。因此又说“又”等。巴利
Pucchitvāti parato pucchitvā. Sampaṭicchāpetunti ‘‘tvaṃ asukanāmo’’ti vatvā tehi ‘‘āmā’’ti paṭijānāpetunti attho. Evaṃ cirakatādianussaraṇasamatthasatinepakkānaṃ appakasireneva satisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘evarūpe bhikkhū sandhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi.
139 139. 以正见等法的组合而觉悟,因此它得到了“菩提”这个名字;它是其中的一个支分,所以叫“觉支”。它殊胜、美好,所以叫“正觉支”。它的特相是现起:对身、受、心、法,以不净、苦、无常、无我来审察,这称为对所缘的现起;这是它的特相,所以叫“现起特相”。它的特相是简择:以四圣谛的逼迫等方式进行简择、审察;这是它的特相,所以叫“简择特相”。它的特相是策励:以令未生起的善法生起等方式策励、激励心;这是它的特相,所以叫“策励特相”。它的特相是遍满:遍满、扩展之性;这是它的特相,所以叫“遍满特相”。它的特相是寂止:对身心热恼的平息、止息;这是它的特相,所以叫“寂止特相”。它的特相是不散乱:对散乱的破坏、消除;这是它的特相,所以叫“不散乱特相”。它的特相是观察:当远离昏沉、掉举的增上心生起时,对于策励、抑制、令喜悦等事不加干预,保持舍与审视;这是它的特相,所以叫“观察特相”。巴利
139. Bujjhati etāyāti ‘‘bodhī’’ti laddhanāmāya sammādiṭṭhiādidhammasāmaggiyā aṅgoti bojjhaṅgo, pasattho, sundaro vā bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo. Upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇoti kāyavedanācittadhammānaṃ asubhadukkhāniccānattabhāvasallakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ ārammaṇe upaṭṭhānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇo. Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ pīḷanādippakārato vicayo upaparikkhā lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti pavicayalakkhaṇo. Anuppannā kusalānuppādanādivasena cittassa paggaho paggaṇhanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti paggahalakkhaṇo. Pharaṇaṃ vipphārikatā lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti pharaṇalakkhaṇo. Upasamo kāyacittapariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti upasamalakkhaṇo. Avikkhepo vikkhepaviddhaṃsanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti avikkhepalakkhaṇo. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte pavattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭattā ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇo.
“由四种原因”是指:念与正知、避开失念的人、亲近具念的人、心倾向于这个——就是这四种原因。
“由六种原因”是指:勤于发问、清净事相、使诸根平衡、避开劣慧的人、亲近有慧的人、心倾向于这个——就是这六种原因。不过在《大念处注》里,会加上“甚深智行之作意”这一项,说成“由七种原因”,应当这样理解。
“由九种原因”是指:作意恶趣的恐怖、作意行道的路、对团食的恭敬、作意遗产的伟大、作意导师的伟大、作意同梵行者的伟大、避开懈怠的人、亲近已发精进的人、心倾向于这个——就是这九种原因。不过在《大念处注》里,会加上“开示利益”和“作意出生的伟大”这两项,说成“由十一种原因”。
“由十种原因”是指:佛随念、法随念、僧伽与戒施天与寂止随念、避开粗涩的人、亲近柔软的人、心倾向于这个——就是这十种。不过在《大念处注》里,会加上“作意可净信经”这一项,说成“由十一种原因”。
“由七种原因”是指:受用细软之食、受用适宜气候之乐、受用威仪之乐、保持中道之行、远离身疲劳者、亲近身轻安者、心倾向于此——这七种。
“由十种原因”是指:清净事物、诸根平衡成就、善巧于相、适时激励心、适时抑制心、适时令心欢喜、适时舍心、避开未得定的人、亲近已得定的人、心倾向于这个——就是这十种原因。不过在《大念处注》里,会加上“作意禅解脱”这一项,说成“由十一种原因”。
“由五种原因”是指:对众生的中舍、对诸行的中舍、避开贪著众生与诸行的人、亲近对众生与诸行中舍的人、心倾向于这个——就是这五种原因。
这里凡有所说,都将在《大念处注》中到来。虽然菩提分法从究竟义上说,因能导向解脱,确实只是与圣道相应的。但经教说法是方便说,所以说“以此观……乃至……说”。巴利
Catūhi kāraṇehīti satisampajaññaṃ, muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanā, upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi. Chahi kāraṇehīti paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi chahi kāraṇehi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘sattahi kāraṇehī’’ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) vakkhati, taṃ gambhīrañāṇacariyāpaccavekkhaṇāti imaṃ kāraṇaṃ pakkhipitvā veditabbaṃ. Navahi kāraṇehīti apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇā, gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇā, piṇḍapātassa apacāyanatā, dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇā, satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇā, sabrahmacārīmahattapaccavekkhaṇā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi navahi kāraṇehi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) pana ānisaṃsadassāvitā, jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇāti imehi saddhiṃ ‘‘ekādasā’’ti vakkhati. Dasahi kāraṇehīti buddhānussati, dhammānussati, saṅghasīlacāgadevatāupasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanā, siniddhapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi dasahi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) pana pasādaniyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇāya saddhiṃ ‘‘ekādasā’’ti vakkhati. Sattahi kāraṇehīti paṇītabhojanasevanatā , utusukhasevanatā, iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattapayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā , passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi sattahi. Dasahi kāraṇehīti vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, nimittakusalatā, samaye cittassa paggahaṇaṃ, samaye cittassa niggahaṇaṃ, samaye cittassa sampahaṃsanaṃ, samaye cittassa ajjhupekkhanaṃ, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanaṃ, samāhitapuggalasevanaṃ, tadadhimuttatāti imehi dasahi kāraṇehi. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) pana ‘‘jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇā’’ti iminā saddhiṃ ‘‘ekādasahī’’ti vakkhati. Pañcahi kāraṇehīti sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatāti imehi pañcahi kāraṇehi. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118) āgamissati. Kāmaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammā nāma nippariyāyato ariyamaggasampayuttā eva niyyānikabhāvato. Suttantadesanā nāma pariyāyakathāti ‘‘iminā vipassanā…pe… kathesī’’ti vuttaṃ.
140 对三界中的诸行,以“无常”来随观,凭这个(方法)就是无常随观;同样生起的观就是(这种随观)。然而,因为那(观)是借着与自己俱生的想被修习而得以显发,所以说“与无常随观俱生之想”。这其实是以想的名义来指称观本身。在无我想等(随观)中,道理也一样。世间观也是有的,因为它们以“无常”等方式生起。“世间观也”这个“也”字,表示这里也有混合(世间与出世间的观);确定了这层含义之后,为了显示它的自性,便说了“离欲”等语。其中,“按照经文的表述”,是因为在那里“离欲、灭尽”被说为涅槃,所以这里所说的“离欲想、灭尽想”,也可以是以涅槃为所缘的想。因此说“也有两种出世间(的想)”。巴利
140. Tebhūmake saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti anupassati etāyāti aniccānupassanā, tathā pavattā vipassanā, sā pana yasmā attanā sahagatasaññāya bhāvitāya vibhāvitā eva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aniccānupassanāya saddhiṃ uppannasaññā’’ti. Saññāsīsena vāyaṃ vipassanāya eva niddeso. Anattasaññādīsupi eseva nayo. Lokiyavipassanāpi honti, yasmā ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā tā pavattantīti. Lokiyavipassanāpīti pi-saddena missakāpettha santīti atthato āpannanti atthāpattisiddhamatthaṃ niddhāretvā sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘virāgo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āgatavasenāti tathā āgatapāḷivasena ‘‘virāgo nirodho’’ti hi tattha nibbānaṃ vuttanti idha ‘‘virāgasaññā, nirodhasaññā’’ti vuttasaññā nibbānārammaṇāpi siyuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dve lokuttarāpi hontī’’ti.
141 慈存在于他,所以那颗心就是慈心。由它发起的身业,就是慈的身业。语业和意业这两类也是同样的道理。这些慈的身业等,是依比丘来说的,因为比丘是最殊胜的团体。不过,正如在比丘中可以得到,在居士中同样可以得到,因为这是四众共通的。为了说明这一点,就说“对于比丘们……”等等。虽然通过听闻最初的梵行法也能得到慈的身业等,但严格来说,这里所期望的是通过行持法的听闻。为了说明这个意思,就说“等行法的圆满”等等。乃至三藏佛语,当以遍问、释义的方式流传时,也应当出于利益的动机而流传。巴利
141. Mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, cittaṃ. Taṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyakammaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Esa nayo sesadvayepi. Imānipi mettākāyakammādīni bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni tesaṃ seṭṭhaparisabhāvato. Yathā pana bhikkhūsupi labbhanti, evaṃ gihīsupi labbhanti catuparisasādhāraṇattāti taṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhūnañhī’’tiādimāha. Kāmaṃ ādibrahmacariyakadhammassavanenapi mettākāyakammāni labbhanti, nippariyāyato pana cārittadhammassavanena ayamattho icchitoti dassento ‘‘ābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇa’’nti āha. Tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ paripucchanaatthakathanavasena pavattiyamānaṃ hitajjhāsayena pavattitabbato.
公开就是显露。这里说的公开性,是指为了某人而做身业时,那个人就在眼前,所以说“当面”。隐秘就是不公开、不显露。不公开性是指为了某人而做身业时,那个人不在眼前,所以说“背后”。以同伴的身份前往,就是走在他们前面。“两者”是指新学比丘和长老们。巴利
Āvīti pakāsaṃ, pakāsabhāvo cettha yaṃ uddissa taṃ kāyakammaṃ karīyati, tassa sammukhabhāvatoti āha ‘‘sammukhā’’ti. Rahoti appakāsaṃ, appakāsatā ca yaṃ uddissa taṃ kāyakammaṃ karīyati, tassa paccakkhābhāvatoti āha ‘‘parammukhā’’ti. Sahāyabhāvagamanaṃ tesaṃ purato. Ubhayehīti navakehi, therehi ca.
举起,就是向上托起来,让它变高。巴利
Paggayhāti paggaṇhitvā uccaṃ katvā.
当然,慈爱湿润的眼睛睁开,以清净的面容注视,这本身就是慈的身业。但如果是因为某种心,眼睛才有慈爱湿润,面容才有清净,那么就是针对这个心而说“这是慈的意业”。巴利
Kāmaṃ mettāsinehasiniddhānaṃ nayanānaṃ ummīlanā, pasannena mukhena olokanañca mettaṃ kāyakammameva, yassa pana cittassa vasena nayanānaṃ mettāsinehasiniddhatā, mukhassa ca pasannatā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāmā’’ti.
“利得”这个词是业依主释(kammasādhana),就像“利得啊,已得利得”这类说法中一样。而在这里,因为经中说“如法所得”,所以它是过去时,因此注释者说“衣等已得的资具”。从法而来,就是如法的。因此说“如法所得”。正是为了显示这个含义,才说了“欺诈”等语。先以心分配,再以身分配,为了显示根本,所以说“这样,以心分配”,这是表明:仅仅生起一个心念,也不应认为已经做了分配。“未分配”是中性名词的修习语;而“受用未分配的利得”则是业依主释。巴利
Lābhasaddo kammasādhano ‘‘lābhāvata, lābho laddho’’tiādīsu viya, so cettha ‘‘dhammaladdhā’’ti vacanato atītakālikoti āha ‘‘cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā’’ti. Dhammato āgatāti dhammikā. Tenāha ‘‘dhammaladdhā’’ti. Imameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kuhanādī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittena vibhajanapubbakaṃ kāyena vibhajananti mūlameva dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ cittena vibhajana’’nti vuttaṃ, tena cittuppādamattenapi paṭivibhāgo na kātabboti dasseti. Appaṭivibhattanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, appaṭivibhattaṃ vā lābhaṃ bhuñjatīti kammaniddeso eva.
他不把所得分给在家人,是为了让自己活命清净。他自己也不享用,也就是自己不拿来受用,心里想的是“愿我不要成为独享的人”。“当接受时……见”这段话,说明他把所得在三个阶段都安立为共用的状态。“当接受时,愿与僧团共用”——这是显示正在接受的阶段;“取后……见”——这是显示接受之后的阶段;而如果接受之前没有这样的用意,这两个阶段就不可能成立,所以接受之前的阶段在义理上也自然成立。具体来说:接受之前,他心里是“愿与僧团共用,我要接受”;正在接受时,是“愿与僧团共用,我正在接受”;接受之后,是“愿与僧团共用,我已经接受了”。像这样,让所得的利得具备这三个阶段的特征,不破坏最后共用的特征而受用的人,就叫作“共受用者”,也叫作“不别分受用者”。巴利
Taṃtaṃ neva gihīnaṃ deti attano ājīvasodhanatthaṃ. Na attanā bhuñjatīti attanāva na paribhuñjati ‘‘mayhaṃ asādhāraṇabhogitā mā hotū’’ti. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhanto ca…pe… passatī’’ti iminā tassa lābhassa tīsupi kālesu sādhāraṇato ṭhapanaṃ dassitaṃ. ‘‘Paṭiggaṇhanto ca saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotū’’ti iminā paṭiggahaṇakālo dassito, ‘‘gahetvā…pe… passatī’’ti iminā paṭiggahitakālo, tadubhayaṃ pana tādisena pubbābhogena vinā na hotīti atthasiddho purimakālo. Tayidaṃ paṭiggahaṇato pubbe vassa hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggahessāmī’’ti. Paṭiggaṇhantassa hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggaṇhāmī’’ti. Paṭiggahetvā hoti ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotūti paṭiggahitaṃ mayā’’ti evaṃ tilakkhaṇasampannaṃ katvā laddhalābhaṃ osānalakkhaṇaṃ avikopetvā paribhuñjanto sādhāraṇabhogī, appaṭivibhattabhogī ca hoti.
这里说的“应忆念法”,就是指这第四项应当忆念的法。因为……戒不清净的人根本谈不上有共受用,所以连开头都做不到,更别说圆满了——这就是这段话的意思。“具足清净戒”这一句,说明利得是如法的。“不破行持”这一句,说明不别分受用和共受用。当这两者都具备时,应忆念法就已经圆满了,所以说“圆满”。如果作“特定分与”——也就是不作不特定的分与,而是从父亲、亲教师、和尚等人开始,或者按长老的次第来布施,这样仍然是应忆念法。但如果对应当照顾的处所作特定分与,那就不是应忆念法了,因为已经成了“特定分与”。因此才说“那便成为障碍照顾”等。如果这样,已经圆满应忆念法的人,难道就完全不能作特定分与吗?并非不能,在适当的地方是允许的。为了说明这一点,接着说了“然而他……”等话。对病人等所作的特定分与布施,属于不别分的一类,因为它没有“我不给某人”这样的拒绝。分别的本质,就是以排他为特征。因此说“剩余者……”等句。而“即使不给”一句中的“亦”字,是说明给也可以,但那应该是出于怜悯,而不是为了完成行持。巴利
Imaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammanti imaṃ catutthaṃ saritabbayuttadhammaṃ. Na hi…pe… gaṇhanti, tasmā sādhāraṇabhogitā eva dussīlassa natthīti ārambhopi tāva na sambhavati, kuto pūraṇanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Parisuddhasīlo’’ti iminā lābhassa dhammikabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vattaṃ akhaṇḍento’’ti iminā appaṭivibhattabhogitaṃ, sādhāraṇabhogitañca dasseti. Sati pana tadubhaye sāraṇīyadhammo pūrito eva hotīti āha ‘‘pūretī’’ti. ‘‘Odissakaṃkatvā’’ti etena anodissakaṃ katvā pituno, ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā therāsanato paṭṭhāya dentassa sāraṇīyadhammoyeva hotīti. Sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hotīti paṭijagganaṭṭhāne odissakaṃ katvā dinnattā. Tenāha ‘‘palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hotī’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassa odissakadānaṃ na vaṭṭatīti? No na vaṭṭati yuttaṭṭhāneti dassento ‘‘tena panā’’tiādimāha. Gilānādīnaṃ odissakaṃ katvā dānaṃ appaṭivibhāgapakkhikaṃ ‘‘asukassa na dassāmī’’ti paṭikkhepassa abhāvato. Byatirekappadhāno hi paṭivibhāgo. Tenāha ‘‘avasesa’’ntiādi. Adātumpīti pi-saddena dātumpi vaṭṭatīti dasseti, tañca kho karuṇāyanavasena, na vattapūraṇavasena.
“善学”:对于应当忆念之法圆满的方式已经好好学过,也就是非常善巧的意思。现在为了显示她的善巧,才说“若善学……”等。用“十二年间才圆满,不在那之前”这句话,显示它难以圆满。确实,它有大果报、大利益,即使在现世中也伴随着更重大的果与利益。而具足这一法的人,就像圣者一样,在世间稀有,具足未曾有法。正因如此,他舍弃了布施福与持戒福的极难断除的敌对法,将其远远地镇伏,以极为清净的心,在世间成为显著、知名而安住。为了通过遮遣与随顺来阐明这个义理,所以说了“如果……”等,这部分容易了解。巴利
Susikkhitāyāti sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇavidhimhi suṭṭhu sikkhitāya, sukusalāyāti attho. Idāni tassā kosallaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘susikkhitāya hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dvādasahi vassehi pūrati, na tato ora’’nti iminā tassa duppūraṇaṃ dasseti. Tathā hi so mahapphalo mahānisaṃso, diṭṭhadhammikehipi tāva garutarehi phalānisaṃsehi ca anugato. Taṃsamaṅgī ca puggalo visesalābhī ariyapuggalo viya loke acchariyabbhutadhammasamannāgato hoti. Tathā hi so duppajahaṃ dānamayassa, sīlamayassa ca puññassa paṭipakkhadhammaṃ sudūre vikkhambhitaṃ katvā suvisuddhena cetasā loke pākaṭo paññāto hutvā viharati, tassimamatthaṃ byatirekato, anvayato ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sace hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
现在,为了说明来世和现世的利益,所以说了“如是……”等话。没有嫉妒,也没有悭吝,因为长久的修习已经把它们清除了。他受到人们的喜爱,因为他以施舍和持戒而清净。因此说:“布施者受人喜爱,众人亲近他”(《增支部》5.34)。他容易得到生活所需,因为布施的缘故——对于志向广大的人来说,得到生活所需正是布施在现世的利益。已经放入钵中的东西布施出去不会减少,因为借着放入钵中的方式,那十二年的大钵一直无间断地被装满。他每天获得最好的物品,因为他的布施是从最上的应供者开始施与的。恐惧等不会生起,因为他在长时间圆满布施时,不对所施物和受施者作种种分别,以对自身无所顾恋的心使心清净。巴利
Idāni ye samparāyike, diṭṭhadhammike ca ānisaṃse dassetuṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Neva issā, na macchariyaṃ hoti cirakālabhāvanāya vidhutabhāvato. Manussānaṃ piyo hoti pariccāgasīlatāya visuddhattā. Tenāha ‘‘dadaṃ piyo hoti bhajanti naṃ bahū’’tiādi (a. ni. 5.34). Sulabhapaccayo hoti dānavasena uḷārajjhāsayānaṃ paccayalābhassa idhānisaṃsabhāvato dānassa. Pattagataṃ assa diyyamānaṃna khīyati pattagatavasena dvādasavassikassa mahāpattassa avicchedena pūritattā. Aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati devasikaṃ dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ aggato paṭṭhāya dānassa dinnattā. Bhayevā…pe… āpajjanti deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappaṃ akatvā attani nirapekkhacittena cirakālaṃ dānapūratāya pasāditacittattā.
其中,“于彼中”是指在那些应当说明的利益当中。这些就是说明它的依据和理由。“虽不得者”是说:因为福德不大,即使没有得到这些利益的人也能知道。与乞食行道相应、同类、随顺的部分,就是他们了知与乞食行道相应、属于那一类、随顺于它的部分。巴利
Tatrāti tesu ānisaṃsesu vibhāvetabbesu. Imāni taṃ dīpanāni vatthūni kāraṇāni. Alabhantāpīti amahāpuññatāya na lābhino samānāpi. Bhikkhācāramaggasabhāganti sabhāgaṃ tabbhāgiyaṃ bhikkhācāramaggaṃ jānanti.
因为这是超越常人的法,也是为了消除长老们的疑惑,他才说:“尊者,我已圆满修习了和合法。”同样地,在第二个事例中,长老也把自己显示了出来。由于人们对他爱戴,也因为资具容易获得,这个事例本身也同样适用。而为了特别说明“归于僧团的物品不再损耗”这一点,才说“这是……中略……在这里就是事例”。巴利
Anuttarimanussadhammattā, therānaṃ saṃsayavinodanatthañca ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammo me bhante pūrito’’ti āha. Tathā hi dutiyavatthusmimpi therena attā pakāsito. Manussānaṃ piyatāya, sulabhapaccayatāyapi idaṃ vatthumeva. Pattagatākhīyanassa pana visesaṃ vibhāvanato ‘‘idaṃ tāva…pe… ettha vatthu’’nti vuttaṃ.
在“山货大供养”时:在塔庙山,以及整个兰卡岛和有一由旬那么大的大海中,除了船堆之类的东西以外,用灯、花、香等举行的盛大供养。“乃至以方便”,就是以某种方式。“相应”:因为圆满了应当忆念的法,所以这样如实地宣说,对你们来说是相称的,这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Giribhaṇḍamahāpūjāyāti cetiyagirimhi sakalalaṅkādīpe, yojanappamāṇe samudde ca nāvāsaṅghāṭādike ṭhapetvā dīpapupphagandhādīhi kariyamānamahāpūjāyaṃ. Pariyāyenapīti lesenapi. Anucchavikanti sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇatopi idaṃ yathābhūtappavedanaṃ tumhākaṃ anucchavikanti attho.
他们因为害怕盗贼,连说都没说一声就逃走了。他们还说:“是因为他们自己日子过得太苦了。”巴利
Anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu corabhayena. ‘‘Attano dujjīvikāyā’’ti ca vadanti.
“将会适合”就是“将会堪任”的意思。那位长老尼成了圆满和合法的人,而由于那位长老的戒德威力,天神便为这件事热心奔走。巴利
Vaṭṭissatīti kappissati. Therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi, therassa pana sīlatejeneva devatā ussukkaṃ āpajji.
这些戒没有破损,所以叫“无破损”。不过,为了说明它们确实有破损的情况,才说了“若……”等话。其中,对于已受具足戒者的戒,应当按诵戒的先后顺序来了解它的开头和结尾,因此说了“七……”等。对于未受具足戒者的戒,按受持的先后顺序也能知道开头和结尾。就像边缘被割破的衣服一样,是说衣物的边缘或末端被割破了;这是一个不同类的比喻,因为这里所讲的“无破损”已经成立。其余的比喻也应这样理解。破裂、裂开的状态就是“破损”,戒有这种情况,就叫有破损的戒。“有孔”等说法也是同样的道理。就像牛从中间被刺穿,因而身上出现异样的颜色,这是相关联的比喻。没有斑点,所以叫“无斑点”。同样,也叫“无杂色”。戒能使人从渴爱的奴役中解脱出来,也就是使人具备导向出离的依止状态。又因为具足这种戒的人被称为自在者、自主者、自由者,所以戒也叫“自由”。因此说“由于能造成自由的状态,所以叫自由”。由于极其清净而值得称赞,所以叫“智者所称赞”。有人会想:“凭这种戒,我可以成为天神,或成为某类天人”,并因此产生“常、恒、永住”或“由戒得清净”等想法;但这种戒不会被这些渴爱和邪见所执取。通过指出“这就是你戒上的过失”,在四种退失中,无论以哪一种退失的显现,都让执着者无法动摇。它能起到导向定的作用,所以叫“导向定的”。巴利
Natthi etesaṃ khaṇḍanti akhaṇḍāni. Taṃ pana nesaṃ khaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha upasampannasīlānaṃ uddesakkamena ādi antā veditabbā. Tenāha ‘‘sattasū’’tiādi. Anupasampannasīlānaṃ pana samādānakkamenapi ādi antā labbhanti. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ cetaṃ ‘‘akhaṇḍānī’’ti imassa adhigatattā. Evaṃ sesānipi udāharaṇāni. Khaṇḍitabhinnatā khaṇḍaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti khaṇḍaṃ, sīlaṃ. ‘‘Chidda’’ntiādīsupi eseva nayo. Vemajjhe bhinnaṃ vinivijjhanavasena visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyāti sambandho. Sabalarahitāni asabalāni. Tathā akammāsāni. Sīlassa taṇhādāsabyato mocanaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayabhāvāpādanaṃ. Yasmā ca taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo serī sayaṃvasī bhujisso nāma hoti, tasmāpi bhujissāni. Tenevāha ‘‘bhujissabhāvakāraṇatobhujissānī’’ti. Suparisuddhabhāvena pāsaṃsattā viññupasatthāni. Imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhaveyyaṃ, devaññataro vā, tattha ‘‘nicco dhuvo sassato’’ti, ‘‘sīlena suddhī’’ti ca evaṃ ādinā taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā. ‘‘Ayaṃ te sīlesu doso’’ti catūsupi vipattīsu yāya kāyaci vipattiyā dassanena parāmaṭṭhuṃ anuddhaṃsetuṃ. Samādhisaṃvattanappayojanāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni.
戒的成就达到平等状态,就是行持一致的戒。凡夫的四遍净戒确实可能没有差别,但那并不是绝对的;而这道戒则是绝对、决定性的,所以说“道戒上没有差别”。这段话正是针对道戒而说的,是针对道戒才说“那些种种戒……”等等。巴利
Samānabhāvūpagatasīlāti sīlasampattiyā samānabhāvaṃ upagatasīlā sabhāgavuttikā. Kāmaṃ puthujjanānañca catupārisuddhisīle nānattaṃ na siyā, taṃ pana na ekantikaṃ, idaṃ ekantikaṃ niyatabhāvatoti āha ‘‘natthi maggasīle nānatta’’nti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttanti maggasīlaṃ sandhāya etaṃ ‘‘yāni tāni sīlānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“由彼而行”:这是我和你们都亲眼所见的。“见”就是道正见。“无过失”:过失已被抖落,贪等恶法已被断尽,这就是它的意思。“出离”:从轮回之苦中脱离、超出。因为当一个人自己出离时,就说他“使具足此见的人从轮回之苦中出离”。凡是遵行导师教诫的人,就是“遵行者”,意思是依照教诫修行的人。“同见的状态”:就是见解相同的状态,通过证悟真理而达到无差别的见解。“唯有增长”:在圣者的教法中,只有功德的增长,没有退减。这就是不退法的教导。世尊在这里宣说它,是因为希望自己的教法能长久住世。巴利
Yāyanti yā ayaṃ mayhañceva tumhākañca paccakkhabhūtā . Diṭṭhīti maggasammādiṭṭhi. Niddosāti nidhutadosā, samucchinnarāgādipāpadhammāti attho. Niyyātīti vaṭṭadukkhato nissarati nigacchati. Sayaṃ niyyantasseva hi ‘‘taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhato niyyāpetī’’ti vuccati. Yā satthu anusiṭṭhi, taṃ karotīti takkaro, tassa, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjanakassāti attho. Samānadiṭṭhibhāvanti sadisadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ saccasampaṭivedhena abhinnadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ. Vuddhiyevāti ariyavinaye guṇehi vuḍḍhiyeva, no parihānīti ayaṃ aparihāniyadhammadesanā attanopi sāsanassa addhaniyataṃ ākaṅkhantena bhagavatā idha desitā.
142 “因为接近般涅槃”这句话,是说再过一年多几个月就要般涅槃了,所以才这么说。“正是这个”指的就是“这就是戒”等那些话。在这里,“iti”这个词既有“方式”的意思,也有“限量”的意思,把两种意思合在一起理解,所以说“这样的戒,这么多量的戒”。“这样的戒”指这样分类的戒。“这么多量”指这是最高的,没有比这更多的。“四遍清净戒”指作为道的资粮的世间四遍清净戒。“心一境性就是定”这里也是同样的道理。“住于哪戒”指住于作为出世間善法基础的、如所说的“先前他的身业、语业、活命已善遍清净”这样的戒。“这个”指道果定。“已修习”指以那个戒完全修习、遍修习。“有大果”指道定对沙门果而言有大果,以止息轮回之苦而有大功德。另一个以镇伏断而有大果,以生起涅槃之乐而有大功德。“住于哪定”指住于作为出世間善法基础的足处禅定和出起所趣定。“那个”指道果慧。“以那个已修习”指以那个如上所说的定完全修习、遍修习。有大果大功德应以定中所述方式理解。此外,应知以觉支、道支、禅支种种为因故有大果,以七种应受供养人差别为因故有大功德。“以哪慧住”指住于哪观慧,或住于定观慧。因为对于止行者,与定俱的慧也确实是证得道的殊胜助缘。“正确地”指完全正确地,使诸漏连痕迹都不剩,如此从一切漏中解脱。这是就无上道刹那而说的。巴利
142.Āsannaparinibbānattāti katipayamāsādhikena saṃvaccharamattena parinibbānaṃ bhavissatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Etaṃyevāti ‘‘iti sīla’’ntiādikaṃyeva iti sīlanti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, parimāṇattho ca ekajjhaṃ katvā gahitoti āha ‘‘evaṃ sīlaṃ ettakaṃ sīla’’nti. Evaṃ sīlanti evaṃ pabhedaṃ sīlaṃ. Ettakanti etaṃ paramaṃ, na ito bhiyyo. Catupārisuddhisīlanti maggassa sambhārabhūtaṃ lokiyacatupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Cittekaggatā samādhīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yasmiṃ sīle ṭhatvāti yasmiṃ lokuttarakusalassa padaṭṭhānabhūte ‘‘pubbeva kho panassa kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ ājīvo suparisuddho hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.431; kathā. 874) evaṃ vuttasīle patiṭṭhāya. Esoti maggaphalasamādhi. Paribhāvitoti tena sīlena sabbaso bhāvito sambhāvito. Mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṃsoti maggasamādhi tāva sāmaññaphalehi mahapphalo, vaṭṭadukkhavūpasamena mahānisaṃso. Itaro paṭippassaddhippahānena mahapphalo, nibbutisukhuppattiyā mahānisaṃso. Yamhi samādhimhiṭhatvāti yasmiṃ lokuttarakusalassa padaṭṭhānabhūte pādakajjhānasamādhimhi ceva vuṭṭhānagāminisamādhimhi ca ṭhatvā. Sāti maggaphalapaññā. Tena paribhāvitāti tena yathāvuttasamādhinā sabbaso bhāvitā paribhāvitā. Mahapphalamahānisaṃsatā samādhimhi vuttanayena veditabbā. Api ca te bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānaṅgappabhedahetutāya mahapphalā sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggalavibhāgahetutāya mahānisaṃsāti veditabbā. Yāya paññāya ṭhatvāti yāyaṃ vipassanāpaññāyaṃ, samādhivipassanāpaññāyaṃ vā ṭhatvā. Samathayānikassa hi samādhisahagatāpi paññā maggādhigamāya visesapaccayo hotiyeva. Sammadevāti suṭṭhuyeva yathā āsavānaṃ lesopi nāvasissati, evaṃ sabbaso āsavehi vimuccati. Aggamaggakkhaṇañhi sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
143 143. 就像世间通用词语的成立方式一样,应当理解「abhiranta」这个词的成立方式。因为「abhirantaṃ」「abhirataṃ」「abhirati」在含义上是一回事。而「abhiranta」这个词是「喜好」的同义词,不是「耽著」的同义词。因为如果是以耽著的方式住在某处,当耽著的对象消失时,他可能会对那个地方产生不喜乐;而这种情况在诸漏尽者身上根本不存在,佛陀就更不用说了,所以说「佛陀……没有……」。如果是因为喜好而住在某处,后来因为那种喜好不在了而转到别处去,佛陀不会有这种事。不过,为了调伏应度化的人,佛陀会在某处住下,等那件事办成了,就只是为了调伏应度者才从那里去别处;这就是这里所说的随喜好而行的意思。在「āyāmā」这个词里,「ā」这个前缀和「āgacchā」意思相同,所以解释说「来,我们走」。而在「ayāmā」这个读法中,a只是一个语助词。称呼长老是因为他住在附近,并不是因为当时没有住在大师身边的比丘。事实上,那时在世尊身边的比丘僧团人数多到无法计算,所以说「与大比丘僧团一起」。「赴芒果苗圃」:这是指与前往芒果苗圃相关的经文。「赴华氏城」:这里也是同样的道理。紧接着的内容意思很清楚,而且前面也已经解释过了。巴利
143. Lokiyatthasaddānaṃ viya abhiranta-saddassa siddhi daṭṭhabbā. Abhirantaṃ abhirataṃ abhiratīti hi atthato ekaṃ. Abhiranta-saddo cāyaṃ abhirucipariyāyo, na assādapariyāyo. Assādavasena hi katthaci vasantassa assādavatthuvigamena siyā tassa tattha anabhirati, yadidaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ natthi, pageva buddhānanti āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ…pe… natthī’’ti. Abhirativasena katthaci vasitvā tadabhāvato aññattha gamanaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ natthi. Veneyyavinayanatthaṃ pana katthaci vasitvā tasmiṃ siddhe veneyyavinayanatthameva tato aññattha gacchanti, ayamettha yathāruci. Āyāmāti ettha ā-saddo ‘‘āgacchā’’ti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘ehi yāmā’’ti. Ayāmāti pana pāṭhe a-kāro nipātamattaṃ. Santikāvacarattā theraṃ ālapati, na pana tadā satthu santike vasantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvato. Aparicchinnagaṇano hi tadā bhagavato santike bhikkhusaṅgho . Tenāha ‘‘mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhi’’nti. Ambalaṭṭhikāgamananti ambalaṭṭhikāgamanapaṭisaṃyuttapāṭhamāha. Pāṭaligamaneti etthāpi eseva nayo. Uttānameva anantaraṃ, heṭṭhā ca saṃvaṇṇitarūpattā.
舍利弗狮子吼的注释巴利
Sāriputtasīhanādavaṇṇanā
145 “具寿舍利弗”等,是经文本身的文句。关于“净信”,在古注中对《净信经》(《长部》3.141)已有详细解释,因此我们也打算就在那里,从义理上对它详细展开——这就是这里的意旨。巴利
145.‘‘Āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi pāṭhajātaṃ. Sampasādanīyeti sampasādanīyasutte (dī. ni. 3.141) vitthāritaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, tasmā mayampi tattheva naṃ atthato vitthārayissāmāti adhippāyo.
破戒等过失的解说巴利
Dussīlaādīnavavaṇṇanā
148 客人来到这里住下,所以叫“客住之处”,那房屋本身就叫“住所房舍”,意思是客人的住宿房屋。两位国王,指离车王和摩揭陀王。伙伴们,指随从仆役。家人,指眷属。铺盖,就是铺展开来;全部铺开,就是完全铺盖,指那完全铺开的东西。这个词是中性抽象名词的说明方式。因此解释说:就像全部铺开那样。巴利
148. Āgantvā vasanti ettha āgantukāti āvasatho, tadeva agāranti āha ‘‘āvasathāgāranti āgantukānaṃ āvasathageha’’nti. Dvinnaṃrājūnanti licchavirājamagadharājūnaṃ. Sahāyakāti sevakā. Kulānīti kuṭumbike. Santhatanti santhari, sabbaṃ santhari sabbasanthari, taṃ sabbasanthariṃ. Bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso cāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā sabbaṃ santhataṃ hoti, eva’’nti.
149 在这里,“无戒”中的“无”字,就像“无慧”等词里的用法一样,表示“没有”的意思,而不是表示谴责,所以说“无戒、无戒行”。关于“破律仪”:一个人领受了戒,后来因为某种原因破了戒,他就是破律仪者。但是,如果有人完全不曾受戒,行为举止毫无操守,这种人怎么能叫破律仪呢?他也因为破坏了善行与防护,同样叫作破律仪者。因为“失坏律仪”的意思就是没有律仪。巴利
149.Dussīloti ettha du-saddo abhāvattho ‘‘duppañño’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.449; a. ni. 5.10) viya, na garahatthoti āha ‘‘asīlo nissīlo’’ti. Bhinnasaṃvaroti ettha yo samādinnasīlo kenaci kāraṇena sīlabhedaṃ patto, so tāva bhinnasaṃvaro hoti. Yo pana sabbena sabbaṃ asamādinnasīlo ācārahīno, so kathaṃ bhinnasaṃvaro nāma hotīti? Sopi sādhusamācārassa parihāniyassa bheditattā bhinnasaṃvaro eva nāma. Vissaṭṭhasaṃvaro saṃvararahitoti hi vuttaṃ hoti.
那个就是各自的技艺处。禁杀日,是指在已经宣布“不要杀生”这样禁杀通告的日子。巴利
Taṃ taṃ sippaṭṭhānaṃ. Māghātakāleti ‘‘mā ghātetha pāṇino’’ti evaṃ māghātāti ghosanaṃ ghositadivase.
恶劣的名声会传扬开来。巴利
Abbhuggacchati pāpako kittisaddo.
因为追悔的缘故,他心里就是会不痛快。巴利
Ajjhāsayena maṅku hotiyeva vippaṭisāribhāvato.
“他的”指的是破戒的人。“受持之后所行的处所”是指一次次起身去做出来的行为。“出现在面前”是指那件事浮现在他心里。睁开眼睛看这个世界,是说睁眼的时候,因为看到自己的妻子儿女等,就看到了这个世界。闭上眼睛看另一个世界,是说闭眼的时候,因为趣相现前,就看到了另一个世界。因此说“四种苦界”等等。第五句,就是通过“身体崩坏”等说到的第五种过患部分。巴利
Tassāti dussīlassa. Samādāya pavattiṭṭhānanti uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya katakāraṇaṃ. Āpāthaṃ āgacchatīti taṃ manaso upaṭṭhāti. Ummīletvā idhalokanti ummīlanakāle attano puttadārādidassanavasena idha lokaṃ passati. Nimīletvā paralokanti nimīlanakāle gatinimittupaṭṭhānavasena paralokaṃ passati. Tenāha ‘‘cattāro apāyā’’tiādi. Pañcamapadanti ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’tiādinā vutto pañcamo ādīnavakoṭṭhāso.
持戒者功德的解释巴利
Sīlavantaānisaṃsavaṇṇanā
150 “以相反的方式”是指,用与前面所说的过患相反的方式来说。比如“不放逸的人能够按时完成各种农活、买卖等事情”这类话;而“他的戒值得称赞,因为他有戒,所以叫具戒者”“戒具足”是指以戒而具足,“具足戒”等等,这些解释词义的话因为容易理解,所以没有加以说明。巴利
150.Vuttavipariyāyenāti vuttāya ādīnavakathāya vipariyāyena. ‘‘Appamatto taṃ taṃ kasivāṇijjādiṃ yathākālaṃ sampādetuṃ sakkotī’’tiādinā ‘‘pāsaṃsaṃ sīlamassa atthīti sīlavā. Sīlasampannoti sīlena samannāgato. Sampannasīlo’’ti evamādikaṃ pana atthavacanaṃ sukaranti anāmaṭṭhaṃ.
151 “超出巴利”是指没有被收录进结集的法谈。“就在那里”就是在那个住所里。巴利
151.Pāḷimuttakāyāti saṅgītianāruḷhāya dhammikathāya. Tatthevāti āvasathāgāre eva.
华氏城建造的详细解释巴利
Pāṭaliputtanagaramāpanavaṇṇanā
152 “以自在为标准”,意思是按自在的程度来衡量,也可以理解为既以自在、也以财富和用具来衡量。因为在世间,各种享受用的器具也被叫作“量”。“把巴咤厘村建成城市”,就是把过去名叫“巴咤厘村”的地方,现在建成一座城市。“建造”就是建立、设立。“为了切断收入来源”,就是为了截断收入的门路。也有版本写作“sahassasevā”,意思就是数以千计,因此解释说“每一群都成千成千地”。“房屋地基”,是指准备盖房子的地方。“心倾向”,是说靠着各自天神的威力,看地师们的心在那些天神已经把持、圈定了地基的地方,就自然朝那里倾向。“靠技艺的力量”,是指依靠与技艺相关的知识的力量。“龙王占据”,是指龙王对居住区域的占有把持,剩下两种也可以照这样理解。“石头”,是指有不祥征兆的石头。“树桩”,是指任何露出来的树桩。他们念了技艺之后,会避开那种容易引起冲突的地方,在没有冲突隐患的地方,与那些把持地基的天神像在商量一样,通过给出指点的方式来建造各自的房屋。“他们”,是指看地师们,也是指所有天神。“将使吉祥增长”,就是让吉祥增盛。因为见到智者等是最上的吉祥,所以说“然后我们……”等等。巴利
152.Issariyamattāyāti issariyappamāṇena, issariyena ceva vittūpakaraṇena cāti evaṃ vā attho daṭṭhabbo. Upabhogūpakaraṇānipi hi loke ‘‘mattā’’ti vuccanti. Pāṭaligāmaṃ nagaraṃ katvāti pubbe ‘‘pāṭaligāmo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ ṭhānaṃ idāni nagaraṃ katvā. Māpentīti patiṭṭhāpenti. Āyamukhapacchindanatthanti āyadvārānaṃ upacchedanāya. ‘‘Sahassasevā’’ti vā pāṭho, sahassaso eva. Tenāha ‘‘ekekavaggavasena sahassaṃ sahassaṃ hutvā’’ti. Gharavatthūnīti gharapatiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni. Cittāni namantīti taṃtaṃdevatānubhāvena tattha tattheva cittāni namanti vatthuvijjāpāṭhakānaṃ, yattha yattha tāhi vatthūni pariggahitāni. Sippānubhāvenāti sippānugatavijjānubhāvena. Nāgaggāhoti nāgānaṃ nivāsappariggaho. Sesadvayesupi eseva nayo. Pāsāṇoti appalakkhaṇapāsāṇo. Khāṇukoti yo koci khāṇuko . Sippaṃ jappitvā tādisaṃ sārambhaṭṭhānaṃ pariharitvā anārambhe ṭhāne tāhi vatthupariggāhikāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ mantayamānāviya taṃtaṃgehāni māpenti upadesadānavasena. Nesanti vatthuvijjāpāṭhakānaṃ, sabbāsaṃ devatānaṃ. Maṅgalaṃ vaḍḍhāpessantīti maṅgalaṃ brūhessanti. Paṇḍitadassanādīni hi uttamamaṅgalāni. Tenāha ‘‘atha maya’’ntiādi.
声音传扬开来,是因为可以用部分的特性来指代整体,就像说“打扮得体的提婆达多”一样。巴利
Saddo abbhuggacchati avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbato yathā ‘‘alaṅkato devadatto’’ti.
“圣者的人们”是指住在圣者国度里的人。“成堆地”就像说“一千、十万”那样,是以大堆货物的规模来做买卖;因为少量货物的买卖在别处也能做,所以说“成堆地”。“商路”的第一种解释是商队往来的通行之处,第二种解释则是商人们的住处;为了说明这个意思,就说“商人的住处”。“拆开货包”是指在那里解开、卸下货包,所以经文说“货物包……”,说的就是这个意思。巴利
Ariyakamanussānanti ariyadesavāsimanussānaṃ. Rāsivasenevāti ‘‘sahassaṃ satasahassa’’ntiādinā rāsivaseneva, appakassa pana bhaṇḍassa kayavikkayo aññatthāpi labbhatevāti ‘‘rāsivasenevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vāṇijāya patho pavattiṭṭhānanti vaṇippathoti purimavikappe attho dutiyavikappe pana vāṇijānaṃ patho pavattiṭṭhānanti, vaṇippathoti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘vāṇijānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Bhaṇḍapuṭe bhindanti mocenti etthāti puṭabhedananti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘bhaṇḍapuṭe…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
这里的“vā”这个词具有集合义,即相当于“ca”这个词的意思。巴利
Ca-kārattho samuccayattho vā-saddo.
153 “咖喇咖尼众生”:因为自己多行黑法,又成为他人招感黑报之缘,所以得到“咖喇咖尼”这个名字,指那些伤害他人、自身福报和威势都很微劣的众生。“他”指世尊。“上午时分”:即上午的某个时候。“以入村的仪容”:即以将要进村时的穿着举止。“整理好随身之物”:就是披好袈裟,手持钵。巴利
153.Kāḷakaṇṇī sattāti attanā kaṇhadhammabahulatāya paresañca kaṇhavipākānatthanibbattinimittatāya ‘‘kāḷakaṇṇī’’ti laddhanāmā parūpaddavakarā appesakkhasattā. Tanti bhagavantaṃ. Pubbaṇhasamayanti pubbaṇhe ekaṃ samayaṃ. Gāmappavisananīhārenāti gāmappavesana nivasanākārena. Kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ katvāti cīvaraṃ pārupitvā, pattaṃ hatthena gahetvāti attho.
这里,“在此”是指在这个地方,或者在自己心里设定的某个特定处所。“防护”是指真正完善地防护,也就是对身体、语言和心都好好地守护、收摄。巴利
Etthāti etasmiṃ vā sakappitappadese. Saññateti sammadeva saññate susaṃvutakāyavācācitte.
应当把功德回向给她们,意思是把自己所修的功德善业转赠给那些天神。在“被供养”等说法里,这种功德回向本身就是供养;而为将来可能发生的灾难预先安排守护,则是进一步的敬奉。人们大多会以回向功德等方式,对已故的亲属做供养、恭敬等事;而这些人虽然不是亲属,却也照样这么做,所以应当认真地为他们安排守护。为了说明天神们在这样互相劝请之后,就为此精勤努力,所以说了“这些”等话。为了说明供奉就是表示尊敬,消除当下已经生起的危难就是回报敬意,所以说了“这些”等话。巴利
Pattiṃ dadeyyāti attanā pasutaṃ puññaṃ tāsaṃ devatānaṃ anuppadajjeyya. ‘‘Pūjitā’’tiādīsu tadeva pattidānaṃ pūjā, anāgate eva upaddave ārakkhasaṃvidhānaṃ paṭipūjā. ‘‘Yebhuyyena ñātimanussā ñātipetānaṃ pattidānādinā pūjanamānanādīni karonti ime pana aññātakāpi samānā tathā karonti, tasmā nesaṃ sakkaccaṃ ārakkhā saṃvidhātabbā’’ti aññamaññaṃ sampavāretvā devatā tattha ussukkaṃ āpajjantīti dassento ‘‘ime’’tiādimāha. Balikammakaraṇaṃ mānanaṃ, sampati uppannaparissayaharaṇaṃ paṭimānanti dassetuṃ ‘‘ete’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
看见美妙的东西,意思是只看见美妙、合意的东西,不看见不合意的东西。巴利
Sundarāni passatīti sundarāni iṭṭhāni eva passati, na aniṭṭhāni.
154 把轻的木棍拿来,像钉门板那样,把木栓互相连接起来敲紧,这就是“敲击木栓”。不用船拼成的筏,是把竹子、芦苇等捆成一束一束,再用藤蔓之类绑起来做成的筏。巴利
154.Āṇiyo koṭṭetvāti lahuke dārudaṇḍe gahetvā kavāṭaphalake viya aññamaññaṃ sambandhe kātuṃ āṇiyo koṭṭetvā. Nāvāsaṅkhepena kataṃ uḷumpaṃ, veḷunaḷādike saṅgharitvā valliādīhi kalāpavasena bandhitvā kattabbaṃ kullaṃ.
“这是对有水之处的称呼”,意思是:对于前面所说的任何一种有水之处,这个“aṇṇava(海洋)”就是它的名称,指的就是大海本身。这里的“sara(流)”指的是河流,因为它流动、奔流。“甚深而广”是指:以不可测度的意义为甚深,以遍满整个三界的意义为广。“不触”是不靠近、不抵达。“小池沼”是因为无法渡过它们。“没有筏就能渡”是说:这样的水域,没有这样的筏就能渡过去;智者已经渡过了。整句的意思是:智者以圣道作为桥,渡过了渴爱之流。巴利
Udakaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacananti yathāvuttassa yassa kassaci udakaṭṭhānassa etaṃ ‘‘aṇṇava’’nti adhivacanaṃ, samuddassevāti adhippāyo. Saranti idha nadī adhippetā sarati sandatīti katvā. Gambhīravitthatanti agādhaṭṭhena gambhīraṃ, sakalalokattayabyāpitāya vitthataṃ. Visajjāti anāsajja appatvā. Pallalāni tesaṃ ataraṇato. Vināyeva kullenāti īdisaṃ udakaṃ kullena īdisena vinā eva tiṇṇā medhāvino janā, taṇhāsaraṃ pana ariyamaggasaṅkhātaṃ setuṃ katvā nittiṇṇāti yojanā.
圣谛说解的注释巴利
Ariyasaccakathāvaṇṇanā
155 大莲华王的。在宫殿尖顶处所建的村落,是指在宫殿尖顶塔所在的地方形成的村落。能使人成为圣者,是指对那些通达真理的人而言,以他们成为圣者的因相这种表达方式来说的。由于真实、不颠倒、如实存在,所以对诸谛的认知是颠倒的。随觉是前分智,通达是以道智现观。在这里,因为通达以随觉为前提,没有随觉就不会有通达,而且某些随觉也与通达相关联,只有这两者都不存在才会在轮回中流转,所以经中说:“由于不随觉……乃至……你们也。”依结生而取有,从一生转移到另一生,称为流转;一生又一生地死去又投生,称为轮转,所以说“从有”等。针对“流转”“轮转”这两个词是以业为成就这一点,在第一种解释中说“我以及你们”。在第二种解释中,则以有的成就为核心,直接按字面说“我的以及你们的”。能引导,就是能拉走,就像被长绳绑住的鸟,手里拿着绳子的人把它拉到别处;以渴爱之绳绑住的有情相续,被行带到另一生,所以它叫“有之引导”,也就是渴爱。它被圣道之剑彻底斩断、切断,所以说“有之引导已被根除”。巴利
155.Mahāpanādassa rañño. Pāsādakoṭiyaṃkatagāmoti pāsādassa patitathupikāya patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne niviṭṭhagāmo. Ariyabhāvakarānanti ye paṭivijjhanti, tesaṃ ariyabhāvakarānaṃ nimittassa kattubhāvūpacāravaseneva vuttaṃ. Tacchāvipallāsabhūtabhāvena saccānaṃ. Anubodho pubbabhāgiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ, paṭivedho maggañāṇena abhisamayo, tattha yasmā anubodhapubbako paṭivedho anubodhena vinā na hoti, anubodhopi ekacco paṭivedhena sambandho, tadubhayābhāvahetukañca vaṭṭeva saṃsaraṇaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ananubodhā…pe… tumhākañcā’’ti. Paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena bhavato bhavantarūpagamanaṃ sandhāvanaṃ, aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanavasena sañcaraṇaṃ saṃsaraṇanti āha ‘‘bhavato’’tiādi. Sandhāvitasaṃsaritapadānaṃ kammasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mayā ca tumhehi cā’’ti paṭhamavikappe. Dutiyavikappe pana bhāvasādhanataṃ hadaye katvā ‘‘mamañceva tumhākañcā’’ti yathārutavaseneva vuttaṃ. Nayanasamatthāti pāpanasamatthā, dīgharajjunā baddhasakuṇaṃ viya rajjuhattho puriso desantaraṃ taṇhārajjunā baddhaṃ sattasantānaṃ abhisaṅkhāro bhavantaraṃ neti etāyāti bhavanetti, taṇhā, sā ariyamaggasatthena suṭṭhu hatā chinnāti bhavanettisamūhatā.
不再退回之法与正觉彼岸的注解巴利
Anāvattidhammasambodhiparāyaṇavaṇṇanā
156 有两个村庄,名字叫“那提迦”(Nātikā)。这里是用 na 这个字母来替代 ña 字母,就像在“无相者不被引导”(animittā na nāyare)等语句中的用法一样。因此说“在亲属村”(ñātigāmake)。“砖”(giñjakā)指的就是烧制的砖。完全用砖建成的住所,就叫“砖造住处”(giñjakāvasatho)。据说那座住所建造时,完全没有用石灰粉刷,只是用烧砖砌起来、盖上顶而已。因此说“在以砖造的住处”(iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe)。不过,横梁、门闩和门板仍然是木制的。巴利
156.Dve gāmā ‘‘nātikā’’ti evaṃ laddhanāmo, ña-kārassa cāyaṃ na-kārādesena niddeso ‘‘animittā na nāyare’’tiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.174; jā. aṭṭha. 2.2.34) viya. Tenāha ‘‘ñātigāmake’’ti . Giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhi eva kato āvasathoti giñjakāvasatho. So kira āvāso yathā sudhāparikammena sampayojanaṃ natthi, evaṃ iṭṭhakāhi eva cinitvā chādetvā kato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe’’ti. Tulādaṇḍakavāṭaphalakāni pana dārumayāneva.
157 “下”是指欲界。这些结因为缘的关系而依附那个“下”,所以叫“下分结”;或者,对“下分”有帮助的,也叫“下分结”。因此说“下分的”等等。“通过三道”是指通过较低的三道。因为这些结应当由那三道来断除,所以它们才成为“下分结”。或者,按照词源的说法,应当被断除的“下分”就被说成“下分结”。现在,为了从反面说明这些结的“下分”性质,说了“在那里”等等。“被镇伏”是指对凡夫来说,由于对治条件不具足而处于被压伏状态;“被彻底断除”是指对圣者来说,由于完全不存在而不再成为色界、无色界投生的障碍,因此说“未被镇伏、未被彻底断除”。“以生的方式”是指以结生的方式。它们不让去,因为阻碍了趣向大果报之业的积集。身见等三结,就像欲贪和嗔恚一样,虽然对于大果报投生并非障碍,但因为是欲有投生的特殊条件,所以即使在大果报有中已生起,当那投生之因业耗尽时,由于成为欲有投生的条件,便从大果报有中将其带来,再令其只在此欲有中投生,因此所有五结都只是下分结。“以结生的方式,其自性是不再来”是指以结生的方式,因此不再从那个世间来到这里。然而,为了见佛、见长老、闻法而前来,则未被阻止。巴利
157.Oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu, paccayabhāvena taṃ oraṃ bhajantīti orambhāgiyāni, orambhāgassa vā hitāni orambhāgiyāni. Tenāha ‘‘heṭṭhābhāgiyāna’’ntiādi. Tīhi maggehīti heṭṭhimehi tīhi maggehi. Tehi pahātabbatāya hi nesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ orambhāgiyatā. Orambhañjiyāni vā orambhāgiyāni vuttāni niruttinayena. Idāni byatirekamukhena nesaṃ orambhāgiyabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vikkhambhitāni samatthatāvighātena puthujjanānaṃ, samucchinnāni sabbaso abhāvena ariyānaṃ rūpārūpabhavūpapattiyā vibandhāya na hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘avikkhambhitāni asamucchinnānī’’ti. Nibbattavasenāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena. Gantuṃ na denti mahaggatagāmikammāyūhanassa vinibandhanato. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīni tīṇi saṃyojanāni kāmacchandabyāpādā viya mahaggatūpapattiyā avinibandhabhūtānipi kāmabhavūpapattiyā visesapaccayattā tattha mahaggatabhave nibbattampi tannibbattihetukammaparikkhaye kāmabhavūpapattipaccayatāya mahaggatabhavato ānetvā puna idheva kāmabhave eva nibbattāpenti, tasmā sabbānipi pañcapi saṃyojanāni orambhāgiyāni eva. Paṭisandhivasena anāgamanasabhāvāti paṭisandhiggahaṇavasena tasmā lokā idha na āgamanasabhāvā. Buddhadassanatheradassanadhammassavanānaṃ panatthāyassa āgamanaṃ anivāritaṃ.
偶尔生起时,是稀有难得的样子;因为缠缚微弱,所以不粗重。这两方面合起来,就是微薄的状态。频繁是指多次。粗重又粗重是指极其强烈。它们生起时,会压制、遍满、征服那个相续,使它陷入黑暗;但因为已经被两道断除,所以它们生起时是极其微薄、极其微弱的。有子女这个说法并不是理由,因为仅仅触摸肢体等也能有子女。这里所说的“这是贪嗔痴的微薄”,是指有的微薄,也就是以稀少的方式。那个是指驳斥了大西瓦长老的说法,这是文句的关联。圣者们能够获得的有,都是具足圆满相的有;如果不可得,那有之微薄又是什么样的呢?因此,为了说明两种情况都不存在有之微薄,才说了“对入流者”等。在第八有中不存在有之微薄,因为第八有本身完全不存在。其余的情况也是同样的道理。巴利
Kadāci karahaci uppattiyā saviraḷākāratā pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya abahalatāti dvedhāpi tanubhāvo. Abhiṇhanti bahuso. Bahalabahalāti tibbatibbā. Yattha uppajjanti, taṃ santānaṃ maddantā, pharantā, sādhentā, andhakāraṃ karontā uppajjanti, dvīhi pana maggehi pahīnattā tanukatanukā mandamandā uppajjanti. ‘‘Puttadhītaro hontī’’ti idaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Tathā hi aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanamattenapi te honti. Idanti ‘‘rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhavatanukavasenāti appakabhavavasena. Tanti mahāsivattherassa vacanaṃ paṭikkhittanti sambandho. Ye bhavā ariyānaṃ labbhanti, te paripuṇṇalakkhaṇabhavā eva. Ye na labbhanti, tattha kīdisaṃ taṃ bhavatanukaṃ, tasmā ubhayathāpi bhavatanukassa asambhavo evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sotāpannassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhame bhave bhavatanukaṃ natthi aṭṭhamasseva bhavassa sabbasseva abhāvato. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
这是针对欲界世间说的,因为没法按其他世间的情况那样来表达。因为一来者不管在天界还是人界,以混杂的方式投生,也都只能归入欲有来界定。世尊也是站在欲界的立场上,才说“只回来这一次”;而“回来此世间”这句话,是在五种一来者里排除了四种,只取其中一种。因为有的人在这里证得一来果后,就在这里入涅槃;有的人在这里证得后,在天界入涅槃;有的人在天界证得后,就在天界入涅槃;有的人在天界证得后,再投生到这里才入涅槃——这四种都不在所说的范围内。只有那种在这里证得一来果后,在天界住到寿命尽,再投生到这里入涅槃的,才是这里所指的。不过,注疏里为了说明“此世间”指的是欲有,用“假如……”等另外列出了一组四类。巴利
Kāmāvacaralokaṃsandhāya vuttaṃ itarassa lokassa vasena tathā vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā. Yo hi sakadāgāmī devamanussalokesu vomissakavasena nibbattati, sopi kāmabhavavaseneva paricchinditabbo. Bhagavatā ca kāmaloke ṭhatvā ‘‘sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā’’ti ca iminā pañcasu sakadāgāmīsu cattāro vajjetvā ekova gahito. Ekacco hi idha sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patvā idheva parinibbāyati, ekacco idha patvā devaloke parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ekacco devaloke patvā idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati, ime cattāro idha na labbhanti. Yo pana idha patvā devaloke yāvatāyukaṃ vasitvā puna idhūpapajjitvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ idha adhippeto. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana imaṃ lokanti kāmabhavo adhippetoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sace hī’’tiādinā aññaṃyeva catukkaṃ dassitaṃ.
在四种……当中,“自性”的意思是:因为他已经完全断除了那些会让人堕入恶趣的恶法。以法决定,就是以道法的决定性。必定,是因为必然会证得更高的道。因此说“至正觉彼岸”。巴利
Catūsu…pe… sabhāvoti attho apāyagamanīyānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ sabbaso pahīnattā. Dhammaniyāmenāti maggadhammaniyāmena. Niyato uparimaggādhigamassa avassaṃbhāvibhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘sambodhiparāyaṇo’’ti.
法镜法门的解说巴利
Dhammādāsadhammapariyāyavaṇṇanā
158 对于各类众生,“某人是入流者,某人是斯陀含”等,如此证得各别之智。“智之生起”与“智之未来”:指此后,“决定以正觉为归宿,仅一次返回此世间后即作苦之边际”等,伴随智慧的生起因缘状态。当以智眼观察时,只不过身体会有疲倦,并非就能对那些应受调伏的有情成就什么利益——这才是意趣所在。“心苦”即心的疲累,因其伴随烦恼,故佛陀们没有。能取、能照见自己,故名为“镜”;成为法的镜,即“法镜”,这是对圣道智的称呼。圣弟子凭借此法镜,因在四圣谛中已摧毁迷乱,如实了知自己后,便能如实记说;不过,由于这部开显此法门的经,才应知有法镜性。“以此法镜”:此处特指道法。巴利
158.Tesaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇagatinti tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ ‘‘asuko sotāpanno, asuko sakadāgāmī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃñāṇādhigamanaṃ. Ñāṇūpapattiṃ ñāṇābhisamparāyanti tato parampi ‘‘niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo, sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karissatī’’tiādinā ca ñāṇasahitaṃ uppattipaccayabhāvaṃ. Olokentassa ñāṇacakkhunā pekkhantassa kāyakilamathova, na tena kāci veneyyānaṃ atthasiddhīti adhippāyo. Cittavihesāti cittakhedo, sā kilesūpasaṃhitattā buddhānaṃ natthi. Ādīyati ālokīyati attā etenāti ādāsaṃ, dhammabhūtaṃ ādāsaṃ dhammādāsaṃ, ariyamaggañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tena ariyasāvakā catūsu ariyasaccesu viddhastasammohattā attānampi yāthāvato ñatvā yāthāvato byākareyya, tappakāsanato pana dhammapariyāyassa suttassa dhammādāsatā veditabbā. Yena dhammādāsenāti idha pana maggadhammameva vadati.
彻底地如实了知之后,由那个相所生起的净信就是证净,也就是通过证得圣道而生起的净信。不过,这种净信就像岩石山一样稳固不动,不会因为任何原因而消失,因此说它是“不动、不退的”。巴利
Avecca yāthāvato jānitvā tannimittauppannapasādo aveccapasādo, maggādhigamena uppannapasādo , so pana yasmā pāsāṇapabbato viya niccalo, na ca kenaci kāraṇena vigacchati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘acalena accutenā’’ti.
“五戒”这个说法,是就在家人的立场而说的,因为他们必须完全遵守这五条。然而对诸圣者来说,一切戒都是可意的。因此说:“但在这里,一切防护也都是能获得的。”巴利
‘‘Pañcasīlānī’’ti gahaṭṭhavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ tehi ekantapariharaṇīyato. Ariyānaṃ pana sabbāni sīlāni kantāneva. Tenāha ‘‘sabbopi panettha saṃvaro labbhatiyevā’’ti.
“一切”是指一切圣者。“不与学处相违”的意思是:像不犯如实告白的罪那样,不犯学处。“在合适的地方”是指适合去做的地方。巴利
Sabbesanti sabbesaṃ ariyānaṃ. Sikkhāpadāvirodhenāti yathā bhūtarocanāpatti na hoti, evaṃ. Yuttaṭṭhāneti kātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne.
庵婆婆利妓女的故事解说巴利
Ambapālīgaṇikāvatthuvaṇṇanā
161 据说那时毗舍离丰裕繁荣,具足一切圆满,达到了极盛。针对这一点,注释中说:“应当依照《犍度》中所说的方式,了解毗舍离的圆满。”据说在那比丘僧团中,大约有五百位比丘是新近出家的,而且精进减退了。正如后面将要说的:“据说那里有些比丘精进减退”等等。为令正念现前:就是为了让他们建立正念。能忆念:就是依身体等,如实以与智相应的念而随念、确知。能正知:就是以种种方式平等地了知、觉了。这里是简略说明,详细解释将在后面《念处注》中讲到。巴利
161. Tadā kira vesālī iddhā phītā sabbaṅgasampannā ahosi vepullappattā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘khandhake vuttanayena vesāliyā sampannabhāvo veditabbo’’ti. Tasmiṃ kira bhikkhusaṅghe pañcasatamattā bhikkhū navā acirapabbajitā ahesuṃ osannavīriyā ca. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘tattha kira ekacce bhikkhū osannavīriyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.165). Satipaccupaṭṭhānatthanti tesaṃ satipaccupaṭṭhāpanatthaṃ. Saratīti kāyādike yathāsabhāvato ñāṇasampayuttāya satiyā anussarati upadhāreti. Sampajānātīti samaṃ pakārehi jānāti avabujjhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana parato satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106) āgamissati.
“总摄一切”这句话,是总括一切青色状态的表达,既包括身体上的,也包括衣饰上的。“正是那个”是指:依总摄一切而说的“青色”这个含义本身。“显示分别”就是显示差别。就像那些离车族国王,有些人本来不是黄色等颜色,却因为涂香而显得是黄色等颜色;同样,有些人本来不是青色等颜色,却因为涂香而显得是青色等颜色,所以说“并非他们的本色是青色”等等。“有青色宝珠在其中”就是青色宝珠,指镶有因陀罗青、大青等青色宝石的装饰品。据说那些装饰品由黄金制成,因为宝石的光芒,看起来就像一片青色。“嵌有青色宝珠”就是被青色宝石所围绕。“被青色衣围绕”就是被青衣、青色毛毯所围绕。“以青色铠甲”就是被青色铠甲所围绕。“于一切处”就是在“成为黄色”等一切地方。“转动”就是碰撞。“带来”是指从这里国王的臣子们征集兵力,这叫“食物”,那个地方的人众因此说“连同所食,即连同地方”。“弹指”也只是以手指摇动而产生的,所以说“摇动手指”。“女人”指妇女。这是对女人的委婉说法,即“女人、妇女、生育者”。巴利
Sabbasaṅgāhakanti sarīragatassa ceva vatthālaṅkāragatassa cāti sabbassa nīlabhāvassa saṅgāhakaṃ vacanaṃ. Tassevāti nīlāti sabbasaṅgāhakavasena vuttaatthasseva. Vibhāgadassananti pabhedadassanaṃ. Yathā te licchavirājāno apītādivaṇṇā eva keci vilepanavasena pītādivaṇṇā khāyiṃsu, evaṃ anīlādivaṇṇā eva keci vilepanavasena nīlādivaṇṇā khāyiṃsūti vuttaṃ ‘‘na tesaṃ pakativaṇṇo nīlo’’tiādi. Nīlo maṇi etesūti nīlamaṇi, indanīlamahānīlādinīlaratanavinaddhā alaṅkārā. Te kira suvaṇṇaviracite hi maṇiobhāsehi ekanīlā viya khāyanti. Nīlamaṇikhacitāti nīlaratanaparikkhittā. Nīlavatthaparikkhittāti nīlavatthanīlakampalaparikkhepā. Nīlavammikehīti nīlakaghaṭaparikkhittehi. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘pītā hontī’’tiādisabbapadesu. Parivaṭṭesīti paṭighaṭṭesi. Āharanti imasmā rājapurisā balinti āhāro, tappattajanapadoti āha ‘‘sāhāranti sajanapada’’nti. Aṅguliphoṭopi aṅguliyā cālanavaseneva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aṅguliṃ cālesu’’nti. Ambakāyāti mātugāmena. Upacāravacanaṃ hetaṃ itthīsu, yadidaṃ ‘‘ambakā mātugāmo jananikā’’ti.
“观看”的意思是:不转开而观看,你们要这样观看。那种不转开的观看,就是一次又一次地看,所以说“反复地看”。“引近”的意思是:就像这离车族王众具备超群的光辉一样,三十三天众也是如此,你们要这样作类比。因此说“使与三十三天等同后再看”。巴利
Avalokethāti apavattitvā olokanaṃ oloketha. Taṃ pana apavattitvā olokanaṃ anu anu dassanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ passathā’’ti. Upanethāti ‘‘yathāyaṃ licchavirājaparisā sobhātisayena yuttā, evaṃ tāvatiṃsaparisā’’ti upanayaṃ karotha. Tenāha ‘‘tāvatiṃsehi samake katvā passathā’’ti.
比丘们,把离车族大众拿来和三十三天相比:这并不是要让人执取相,而只是应当这样理解——这些国王的权势成就,就像天界的成就一样,正如在次第说法中讲说天界成就那样。不过,在那些比丘当中,有些人可能会在那里执取相,针对这一点才说“让人执取相”。这是出于利益他们的心,为了那些比丘,就像为了具寿难陀的利益而展示天界成就一样。因此说“据说在那里”等。“精进退减”:意思是在正确修行上精进低落,或者说是舍弃了精进。“为了阐明无常相”:就是借那些国王的情况,向比丘们显示无常相。巴利
‘‘Upasaṃharatha bhikkhave licchaviparisaṃ tāvatiṃsasadisa’’nti nayidaṃ nimittaggāhe niyojanaṃ, kevalaṃ pana dibbasampattisadisā etesaṃ rājūnaṃ issariyasampattīti anupubbikathāya saggasampattikathanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesu pana bhikkhūsu ekaccānaṃ tattha nimittaggāhopi siyā, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘nimittaggāhe uyyojetī’’ti. Hitakāmatāya tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ yathā āyasmato nandassa hitakāmatāya saggasampattidassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tatra kirā’’tiādi. Osannavīriyāti sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ avasannavīriyā, ossaṭṭhavīriyā vāti attho. Aniccalakkhaṇavibhāvanatthanti tesaṃ rājūnaṃ vasena bhikkhūnaṃ aniccalakkhaṇavibhūtabhāvatthaṃ.
竹林村雨安居的注释巴利
Veḷuvagāmavassūpagamanavaṇṇanā
163 竹林村附近:指一个附属村落,位于上午或傍晚能去得了又回得来的邻近地方。聚集:就是正确地前往。于他:指世尊。巴利
163.Samīpe veḷuvagāmoti pubbaṇhaṃ vā sāyanhaṃ vā gantvā nivattanayogye āsannaṭṭhāne niviṭṭhā parivāragāmo. Saṅgammāti sammā gantvā. Assāti bhagavato.
164 “粗重”是指粗糙、沉重。“不调和病”是指由界不调和而生起的、相当严重的疾病,不是一般的小病。“以智决断”是指以智慧如实决断、衡量诸受的刹那性、苦性和无我性。“忍受”是指战胜那些感受,以善加压制的方式将它们承担于自身而安住,而不是被它们战胜。因此说“不受恼害”等。“无苦”是指不因心苦而受苦,但身苦不能说“不存在”。因为如果没有身苦,忍受本身就不可能。“不告知”就是不通知、不打招呼。“不征询”就是不征求意见,也就是说没有给予教诫。“以预备道精进”是指以果等至的近行精进。“以果等至精进”是指以与果等至相应的精进。“已镇伏”就是已去除。就像瞻波树等正在开花时,若在树干上刻下划痕,只要那划痕还没消除,它开花的能力就被压制、去除了;同样,通过上述精进留下的“划痕”,那些感受在导师体内,于预定的时间内被镇伏、去除了。因此说“镇伏即去除”。“乃至命”是因为命行也由业所造作,当它因违害之缘结合而将被切断时,通过精进成就的努力而得以维持。“以决意”就是作出决意。因此说“愿十个月不要生起”而入定。而那决意与转起,理应被称为“决意”和“转起”,所以说“决意后转起”。巴利
164.Pharusoti kakkhaḷo, garutaroti attho. Visabhāgarogoti dhātuvisabhāgatāya samuṭṭhito bahalatararogo, na ābādhamattaṃ. Ñāṇena paricchinditvāti vedanānaṃ khaṇikataṃ, dukkhataṃ, attasuññatañca yāthāvato ñāṇena paricchijja parituletvā. Adhivāsesīti tā abhibhavanto yathāparimadditākārasallakkhaṇena attani āropetvā vāsesi, na tāhi abhibhuyyamāno. Tenāha ‘‘avihaññamāno’’tiādi. Adukkhiyamānoti cetodukkhavasena adukkhiyamāno , kāyadukkhaṃ pana ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Asati hi tasmiṃ adhivāsanāya eva asambhavoti. Anāmantetvāti anālapitvā. Anapaloketvāti avissajjitvā. Tenāha ‘‘ovādānusāsaniṃ adatvāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Pubbabhāgavīriyenāti phalasamāpattiyā parikammavīriyena. Phalasamāpattivīriyenāti phalasamāpattisampayuttavīriyena. Vikkhambhetvāti vinodetvā. Yathā nāma pupphanasamaye campakādirukkhe vekhe dinne yāva so vekho nāpanīyati, tāvassa pupphanasamatthatā vikkhambhitā vinoditā hoti, evameva yathāvuttavīriyavekhadānena tā vedanā satthu sarīre yathāparicchinnaṃ kālaṃ vikkhambhitā vinoditā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhetvāti vinodetvā’’ti. Jīvitampi jīvitasaṅkhāro kammunā saṅkharīyatīti katvā. Chijjamānaṃ virodhipaccayasamāyogena payogasampattiyā ghaṭetvā ṭhapīyati. Adhiṭṭhāyāti adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā. Tenāha ‘‘dasamāse mā uppajjitthāti samāpattiṃ samāpajjī’’ti. Taṃ pana ‘‘adhiṭṭhānaṃ, pavattana’’nti ca vattabbataṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā pavattetvā’’ti.
刹那等至,是指没有事先作那种准备行,就能随其时机直接进入的等至。因为没有作殊胜的准备行,所以受又会再次遍布全身。色七法和无色七法,应当依照《清净道论注》中详细说明的方式来理解。善加镇伏,是因为准备行特别殊胜。现在为了用比喻说明这个道理,便说了“譬如名”等话。已移除,就是已经去掉。以十四种行相善加调和,就是依那些色七法和无色七法,以十四种方式,让观心,或者让整个身体,因不调和之病所生的干涩变得滋润而无病之后,就不再生起,因为正自觉者以极其殊胜的等至之力善加镇伏了它们。巴利
Khaṇikasamāpattīti tādisaṃ pubbābhisaṅkhāraṃ akatvā ṭhānaso samāpajjitabbasamāpatti. Puna sarīraṃ vedanā ajjhottharati savisesapubbābhisaṅkhārassa akatattā. Rūpasattakaarūpasattakāni visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.706, 717) vitthāritanayena veditabbāni. Suṭṭhu vikkhambheti pubbābhisaṅkhārassa sātisayattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apabyūḷhoti apanīto. Cuddasahākārehi sannetvāti tesaṃyeva rūpasattakaarūpasattakānaṃ vasena cuddasahi pakārehi vipassanācittaṃ, sakalameva vā attabhāvaṃ visabhāgarogasañjanitalūkhabhāvanirogakaraṇāya sinehetvā na uppajjiyeva sammāsambuddhena sātisayasamāpattivegena suvikkhambhitattā.
曾经生病,后来又痊愈了,意思是:以前生病,后来从那种病态中恢复过来。所谓“僵硬性”,是指身体变得僵硬,而这种僵硬又以沉重为前提,所以说“产生了沉重感,产生了僵硬感”。“以种种方式不再现起”这句话,是在说明:由于悲伤的力量,我连方向感都失去了。所谓“念处等法”,就是指身随观等随观之法,它们过去曾清晰地现前,如今对我来说已经不再明了。巴利
Gilāno hutvā puna vuṭṭhitoti pubbe gilāno hutvā puna tato gilānabhāvato vuṭṭhito. Madhurakabhāvo nāma sarīrassa thambhitattaṃ, taṃ pana garubhāvapubbakanti āha ‘‘sañjātagarubhāvo sañjātathaddhabhāvo’’ti. ‘‘Nānākārato na upaṭṭhahantī’’ti iminā disāsammohopi me ahosi sokabalenāti dasseti. Satipaṭṭhānādidhammāti kāyānupassanādayo anupassanādhammā pubbe vibhūtā hutvā upaṭṭhahantāpi idāni mayhaṃ pākaṭā na honti.
165 “作内部”是指只放在自己这里。“令人作内部”是指先前以平等心用佛法摄受那个人。“在年轻的时候”是指在自己年轻的时候。“不告诉任何人”是指不向自己的任何弟子讲说那部成了秘密的教本。“作握拳”是指像握拳一样把它弄成秘密。或者说,如果那东西失坏了,所有以它为根本的法就会灭去;那最初作为根本的法一旦失坏,法就随着这个失坏而忘失、消失,所以叫“握拳”。这是要显示:并没有像那样握拳藏起来放在某处的东西。巴利
165.Abbhantaraṃ karoti nāma attaniyeva ṭhapanato. Puggalaṃ abbhantaraṃ karoti nāma samānattatāvasena dhammena pubbe tassa saṅgaṇhato. Daharakāleti attano daharakāle. Kassaci akathetvāti kassaci attano antevāsikassa upanigūhabhūtaṃ ganthaṃ akathetvā. Muṭṭhiṃ katvāti muṭṭhigataṃ viya rahasibhūtaṃ katvā. Yasmiṃ vā naṭṭhe sabbo taṃmūlako dhammo vinassati, so ādito mūlabhūto dhammo, mussati vinassati dhammo etena naṭṭhenāti muṭṭhi, taṃ tathārūpaṃ muṭṭhiṃ katvā pariharitvā ṭhapitaṃ kiñci natthīti dasseti.
“唯我”这个限定,是为了表明护持比丘僧团不是与他人共同的事;不过,如果没有这个限定,那么像“我护持比丘僧团”这样的话,就应该理解为是在显示:在护持比丘僧团时没有我执和我所执。“以应称呼之义”:就是以“导师”这个称呼的意义。意思是“比丘们不应存在”。也有写成“Mā vā ahosī”的读法。当这种心态不生起时,就不会有“我将护持比丘僧团”这类心理活动。“为了显示已达最后身”这句话,是在说明:就像寿命一样,佛陀的事业也已经圆满结束了。为了让车轴外侧部分牢固而缠绑,叫做轴缚;为了让轮辋和毂孔接合处牢固而缠绑,叫做轮缚。巴利
Ahamevāti avadhāraṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghapariharaṇassa aññasādhāraṇicchādassanatthaṃ, avadhāraṇena pana vinā ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhusaṅgha’’ntiādi bhikkhusaṅghapariharaṇe ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uddisitabbaṭṭhenāti ‘‘satthā’’ti uddisitabbaṭṭhena. Mā vāahesuṃ bhikkhūti adhippāyo. ‘‘Mā vā ahosī’’ti vā pāṭho. Evaṃ na hotīti ‘‘ahaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmī’’tiādi ākārena cittappavatti na hoti. ‘‘Pacchimavayaanuppattabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vutta’’nti iminā vayo viya buddhakiccampi pariyositakammanti dīpeti. Sakaṭassa bāhappadese daḷhībhāvāya veṭhadānaṃ bāhabandho. Cakkanemisandhīnaṃ daḷhībhāvāya veṭhadānaṃ cakkabandho.
“其义”是指:通过缠绕混合的方式而认为的已说之义。色等诸法,因为现起时像有形体一样,所以是色相等等,即那些色相等等。世间受,是指通过灭尽它们而应当入果等至的那些受;这些受灭尽时,就安乐,对于被剧烈苦受所逼迫的身体也是如此。“为此目的”是指为了安住于果等至。两个部分被水所浸入,因此是“洲”,即被洪流所围绕而不被淹没的陆地部分;但在这里,是指不被四种瀑流、或者说轮回大瀑流所淹没的自身,这才是“洲”的意。“以自为皈依”是指依靠自己。“以自为依怙”是指以自己为归宿。不要以其他为依怙,不要以其他任何趣处、皈依、归宿为念。为什么?因为这里的“自己”在胜义上是指内里的法,如此成就的它,就是你们的洲、庇护、趣处、归宿。因此说“以法为洲”等等。又这样说:“自己确实是自己的救护者,其他谁能作救护者呢?”(法句经160, 380)因为教诫只是依附于他人,而其他一切成就都只依赖于人自己。因此世尊说:“你们应当精勤作应作之事,如来只是宣说者。”(法句经276)“此为最上”是指对于那瑜伽者的最上,因为不存在超过它的。因此说“这些是最上者”等等。“我的”是指在我的教法中。一切那些以四念处为行境者,即修习、增长四种念处,并以那同样的行境作为自己活动的立足处而安住的比丘们,将成为最上者。巴利
Tamatthanti veṭhamissakena maññeti vuttamatthaṃ. Rūpādayo eva dhammā saviggaho viya upaṭṭhānato rūpanimittādayo, tesaṃ rūpanimittādīnaṃ. Lokiyānaṃ vedanānanti yāsaṃ nirodhanena phalasamāpatti samāpajjitabbā, tāsaṃ nirodhā phāsu hoti, tathā bāḷhavedanābhitunnasarīrassāpi. Tadatthāyāti phalasamāpattivihāratthāya. Dvīhi bhāgehi āpo gato etthāti dīpo, oghena parigato hutvā anajjhotthaṭo bhūmibhāgo, idha pana catūhipi oghehi, saṃsāramahogheneva vā anajjhotthaṭo attā ‘‘dīpo’’ti adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘mahāsamuddagatā’’tiādi. Attassaraṇāti attappaṭisaraṇā. Attagatikā vāti attaparāyaṇāva . Mā aññagatikāti aññaṃ kiñci gatiṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ mā cintayittha. Kasmā? Attā nāmettha paramatthato dhammo abbhantaraṭṭhena, so evaṃ sampādito tumhākaṃ dīpaṃ tāṇaṃ gati parāyaṇanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammadīpā’’tiādi. Tathā cāha ‘‘attā hi attano nātho, ko hi nātho paro siyā’’ti (dha. pa. 160, 380) upadesamattameva hi parasmiṃ paṭibaddhaṃ, aññā sabbā sampatti purisassa attādhīnā eva. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘tumhehi kiccaṃ ātappaṃ, akkhātāro tathāgatā’’ti (dha. pa. 276). Tamaggeti tamayogassa agge tassa atikkantābhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘ime aggatamā’’tiādi. Mamāti mama sāsane. Sabbepi te catusatipaṭṭhānagocarā vāti catubbidhaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā tadeva gocaraṃ attano pavattiṭṭhānaṃ katvā ṭhitā eva bhikkhū agge bhavissanti.
关于“相与光明”这一说法的详细解释巴利
Nimittobhāsakathāvaṇṇanā
166 世尊多次住在毗舍离,所以为了确定并说明这次进入毗舍离的情形,先问“是什么时候进入的”,然后从他来时开始说明,因此说了“据说世尊……”等话。“沿着来时的路回去”:就是沿着他先前一直到竹竿村所走的那条原路返回。“按照已限定的时间”:就是按照已明确划分的时间,从果定中出定。“从那里”:就是从果定。“此”:就是现在所说的这种方式。观察白天住处等,是为了显示般涅槃已成定局。“已舍弃”:就是已放下寿行,心想“我现在只再住世七日”。巴利
166. Anekavāraṃ bhagavā vesāliyaṃ viharati, tasmā imaṃ vesālippavesanaṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘kadā pāvisī’’ti pucchitvā āgamanato paṭṭhāya taṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādimāha. Āgatamaggenevāti pubbe yāva veḷuvagāmakā āgatamaggeneva paṭinivattento. Yathāparicchedenāti yathāparicchinnakālena. Tatoti phalasamāpattito. Ayanti idāni vuccamānākāro. Divāṭṭhānolokanādi parinibbānassa ekantikabhāvadassanaṃ. Ossaṭṭhoti vissaṭṭho āyusaṅkhāro ‘‘sattāhameva mayā jīvitabba’’nti.
他说“兄弟中的年长者和年幼者”,是指所有的同梵行者。巴利
Jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhātikānanti sabbeva sabrahmacārino sandhāya vadati.
我要让他走上修行之路,也就是说,我要引导他进入修行之道。摩尼板,就是镶嵌摩尼宝珠、位于前方的受用板。那初次见面,是指他以游方者的形象来到竹林精舍时实现的那次会面,这就是初次见面。或者也可以说,在发愿的时候,因为深信无比见佛世尊所说的话,当时就像亲眼见到一样,实现了与你们的相会,这也算是初次见面。归程游行,就是为了返回而进行的游方。巴利
Paṭipādessāmīti maggapaṭipattiyā niyojessāmi. Maṇiphalaketi maṇikhacite pamukhe atthataphalake. Taṃ paṭhamaṃdassananti yaṃ veḷuvane paribbājakarūpena āgatassa siddhaṃ dassanaṃ, taṃ paṭhamadassanaṃ. Yaṃ vā anomadassissa bhagavato vacanaṃ saddahantena tadā abhinīhārakāle paccakkhato viya tumhākaṃ dassanaṃ siddhaṃ, taṃ paṭhamadassanaṃ. Paccāgamanacārikanti paccāgamanatthaṃ cārikaṃ.
“七日”这个词,是为了表达彻底结合的关系而用的宾格说法。据说那位长老出生的房间,比其他房间更僻静,而且有一个敞开的庭院,因此适合诸天和梵天前来接近,所以才说:“请把出生室收拾好。”“So”这个词,是指上面刚提到的那件事。“那件事正在进行”,是说他因为想住在那里而说了那件事。巴利
Sattāhanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Therassa jātovarakagehaṃ kira itaragehato vivekaṭṭhaṃ, vivaṭaṅgaṇañca, tasmā devabrahmānaṃ upasaṅkamanayogyanti ‘‘jātovarakaṃ paṭijaggathā’’ti vuttaṃ. Soti uparevato. Taṃ pavattinti tattha vasitukāmatāya vuttaṃ taṃ.
长老依据“如来即使知道,也会发问”这一原则,问道:“你们是谁?”当被问“你比四大天王更伟大”时,他把自己的伟大归到导师身上,说:“这些近事女就像园丁一样,是我们导师的侍者。”因为赞叹声闻弟子的成就,实质上正是在彰显导师的成就。巴利
‘‘Jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti (pārā. 16, 165) iminā nīhārena thero ‘‘ke tumhe’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Tvaṃ catūhi mahārājehi mahantataro’’ti puṭṭho attano mahattaṃ satthu upari pakkhipanto ‘‘ārāmikasadisā ete upāsike amhākaṃ satthuno’’ti āha. Sāvakasampattikittanampi hi atthato satthu sampattiṃyeva vibhāveti.
她因为长老说法的威力,加上自己善根资粮具足、智慧已经成熟,所以安住在入流果上。巴利
Sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāyāti therassa desanānubhāvena, attano ca upanissayasampattiyā ñāṇassa paripakkattā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahitvā.
“这些”指的是前面所说的那些。“在此”指的是“进入毗舍离乞食”这句话里所说的进入毗舍离的时候。“次第论”就是按顺序开示的说法。巴利
Ayanti yathāvuttā. Etthāti ‘‘vesāliṃ piṇḍāya pāvisī’’ti etasmiṃ vesālīpavese. Anupubbīkathāti anupubbadīpanī kathā.
167 在乌德那夜叉的支提处:指以一位名叫乌德那的夜叉的住处为因由,用砖砌成、被大众恭敬尊崇的地方。所作住处:指专为世尊而建的住处。被称为:依照先前的叫法,就称为“乌德那支提”。在乔达摩支提等中也是如此:也就是“乔达摩支提”等等这些地方也一样。此即同一理趣:这是类推说明在支提处建造住处的情形。已增长:指通过修习圆满而得以长养。屡屡修作:指通过修习的反复修集,一次又一次地令它现起。如调适之车般修作:就像一匹被熟练驭者驾驭的良马之车,能随驭者心意自在地行驶;同样,它也被带到能随心所欲运行而无障碍的状态。以住立之义:就是以决意之义。如基址般修作:因为完全清除了杂染,作为神足境界的现起处,就像一块已经彻底清除障碍的基址一样被修作。已决意:因为对立的障碍已被远离,以善修习的状态,安立在能够一一决意的堪任性中。周遍积集:在一切方面都达到了修习的累积。因此说“善增长”。善精勤:为了神足修习而达到顶点,完全正确地反复修习。巴利
167.Udenayakkhassa cetiyaṭṭhāneti udenassa nāma yakkhassa āyatanabhāvena iṭṭhakāhi cite mahājanassa cittīkataṭṭhāne. Katavihāroti bhagavantaṃ uddissa katavihāro. Vuccatīti purimavohārena ‘‘udenacetiya’’nti vuccati. Gotamakādīsupīti ‘‘gotamakacetiya’’nti evaṃ ādīsupi. Eseva nayoti cetiyaṭṭhāne katavihārabhāvaṃ atidisati. Vaḍḍhitāti bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paribrūhitā. Punappunaṃ katāti bhāvanāya bahulīkaraṇena aparāparaṃ pavattitā. Yuttayānaṃ viya katāti yathā yuttaṃ ājaññayānaṃ chekena sārathinā adhiṭṭhitaṃ yathāruci pavattati, evaṃ yathārucipavattirahataṃ gamitā. Patiṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Vatthu viya katāti sabbaso upakkilesavisodhanena iddhivisayatāya pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato suvisodhitaparissayavatthu viya katā. Adhiṭṭhitāti paṭipakkhadūrībhāvato subhāvitabhāvena taṃtaṃadhiṭṭhānayogyatāya ṭhapitā . Samantato citāti sabbabhāgena bhāvanupacayaṃ gamitā. Tenāha ‘‘suvaḍḍhitā’’ti. Suṭṭhu samāraddhāti iddhibhāvanāya sikhāppattiyā sammadeva saṃsevitā.
“不定”是指用“无论任何人”这种不定的说法。“确定”是指通过“如来的”这一具体显示来确定。所谓“寿量”,说的是极限的寿命。之所以取这个寿量,其理由应当依照《梵网经注》和《梵网经复注》里所说的方式来了知。不过,摩诃西瓦长老说:“把‘能令大菩萨在最后一生中结生的业,具有产生不可数寿命的能力’这一点放在心里,诸佛的寿行能够克服危险障碍的能力,在圣典中本来就已经提到了。照这样说,世尊只住在这个贤劫就可以了。”以“被断齿等所制伏”这一句,表明正如以神通力不能阻挡衰老,同样也不能阻挡死亡,因此其意义已经成立。即使以“箭射向何处,又落在何处”这样不同的方式提出长老的主张,也应当看作只是对注释言辞的成立。因此说“那不被接受……限定”。巴利
Aniyamenāti ‘‘yassa kassacī’’ti aniyamavacanena. Niyametvāti ‘‘tathāgatassā’’ti sarūpadassanena niyametvā. Āyuppamāṇanti paramāyuppamāṇaṃ vadati, tasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.40; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.40) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Mahāsivatthero pana ‘‘mahābodhisattānaṃ carimabhave paṭisandhidāyino kammassa asaṅkhyeyyāyukatāsaṃvattanasamatthataṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā buddhānaṃ āyusaṅkhārassa parissayavikkhambhanasamatthatā pāḷiyaṃ āgatā evāti imaṃ bhaddakappameva tiṭṭheyyā’’ti avoca. ‘‘Khaṇḍiccādīhi abhibhuyyatī’’ti etena yathā iddhibalena jarāya na paṭighāto, evaṃ tena maraṇassapi na paṭighātoti atthato āpannamevāti. ‘‘Kva saro khitto, kva ca nipatito’’ti aññathā vuṭṭhitenāpi theravādena aṭṭhakathāvacanameva samatthitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘so na ruccati…pe… niyamita’’nti.
心被缠缚:就像根本无法分辨什么是利益、什么是不利益,心被压制时就是这样。而这种压制,就像大水洪流吞没了少量的水一样,所以经文说“心被淹没”。其他人:指长老,或者圣者之外的任何一个凡夫。这里举出凡夫,是为了说明:就像一个颠倒想完全没断除的凡夫,心被魔缠缚后,根本无法分辨任何利益,同样,长老也完全没能辨认出世尊所显现的相与光明。为了说明这一点,所以经文说“是魔啊”等等。四种颠倒:在不净的事物上生起“净”的想法,这是想颠倒、心颠倒;在苦的事物上生起“乐”的想法,这是想颠倒、心颠倒。这就是四种颠倒。因此:即使其他八种颠倒已经断除,但因为上面所说的四种颠倒还没有断除。他的:指长老的。压迫:仅仅碰触一下就好像在压迫一样,否则被它压迫的众生就会死亡。能做什么呢,不能做什么呢——这是他的意思。为什么不能做呢?难道它不是已经进入了上首弟子的腹中吗?确实进入了,但那只是为了显示自己的威力,并不是以伤害为意图。然而这里基于伤害的意图而说“能做什么呢”,是因为他已经证得了压碎心脏的方法。相与光:在这里,对于“愿世尊住世一劫”这个祈请住世一整劫的请求,世尊以“阿难,无论任何人修习四神足……”等语,用间接的说法,借着自己修习四神足的威力,显示出能够住世一劫的能力,由此生起的相,就是“相”;而舍弃这种间接方式,直接显露自己意趣的光明,就是“光”。明知:明知自己被魔缠缚的状态。因为把过失归咎于自己,会让众生的忧愁变得淡薄,不会太强烈,所以他说“以归咎于魔而使忧愁微薄”。那么,长老在被魔缠缚心时发生的事情,他是后来才知道的吗?以他自己的能力,是不知道的;但借着佛的威力,他才得以知晓。巴利
Pariyuṭṭhitacittoti yathā kiñci atthānatthaṃ sallakkhetuṃ na sakkā, evaṃ abhibhūtacitto. So pana abhibhavo mahatā udakoghena appakassa udakassa ajjhottharaṇaṃ viya ahosīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ajjhotthaṭacitto’’ti. Aññopīti therato, ariyehi vā aññopi yo koci puthujjano. Puthujjanaggahaṇañcettha yathā sabbena sabbaṃ appahīnavipallāso mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto kiñci atthaṃ sallakkhetuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ thero bhagavatā kataṃ nimittobhāsaṃ sabbaso na sallakkhesīti dassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘māro hī’’tiādi. Cattāro vipallāsāti asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti saññāvipallāso, cittavipallāso, dukkhe ‘‘sukha’’nti saññāvipallāso, cittavipallāsoti ime cattāro vipallāsā. Tenāti yadipi itare aṭṭha vipallāsā pahīnā, tathāpi yathāvuttānaṃ catunnaṃ vipallāsānaṃ appahīnabhāvena. Assāti therassa. Maddatīti phusanamattena maddanto viya hoti, aññathā tena maddite sattānaṃ maraṇameva siyā. Kiṃ sakkhissati, na sakkhissatīti adhippāyo. Kasmā na sakkhissati, nanu esa aggasāvakassa kucchiṃ paviṭṭhoti? Saccaṃ paviṭṭho, tañca kho attano ānubhāvadassanatthaṃ, na vibādhanādhippāyena. Vibādhanādhippāyena pana idha ‘‘kiṃ sakkhissatī’’ti vuttaṃ hadayamaddanassa adhigatattā. Nimittobhāsanti ettha ‘‘tiṭṭhatu bhagavā kappa’’nti sakalakappaṃ avaṭṭhānayācanāya ‘‘yassa kassaci ānanda cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā’’tiādinā aññāpadesena attano caturiddhipādabhāvanānubhāvena kappaṃ avaṭṭhānasamatthatāvasena saññuppādanaṃ nimittaṃ, tathā pana pariyāyaṃ muñcitvā ujukaṃyeva attano adhippāyavibhāvanaṃ obhāso. Jānantoyeva vāti mārena pariyuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ jānanto eva. Attano aparādhahetuto sattānaṃ soko tanuko hoti, na balavāti āha ‘‘dosāropanena sokatanukaraṇattha’’nti. Kiṃ pana thero mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittakāle pavattiṃ pacchā jānātīti? Na jānāti sabhāvena, buddhānubhāvena pana anujānāti.
魔请求的注释巴利
Mārayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
168 把众生引向无益之事,就是通过毁掉他们的功德来杀害他们;或者说,他以系缚离贪之法,让众生在每一处投生时都像被杀害一样,所以说“杀害者,就是魔罗”。因为他极其邪恶,所以叫“邪恶者”。因为具足黑法,所以叫“黑者”。因为能终结离贪等功德,所以叫“终结者”。他从不放过引导众生走向无益的行为,所以叫“那木质”。他用自己的魔索捆绑放逸的人,或者放逸的人是他的眷属,所以叫“放逸者之亲”。说到“第八个七日”,是指第七个七日之后的七天。这并不像以床座七日等那样,因为并不存在一个名为“第八个七日”的固定事务。因为在第七个七日之后,世尊在阿阇波罗尼拘律树下,大梵天和帝释天请求他说法,魔知道后,心想:“现在他就要通过说法让众生超越我的领域了。”于是生起忧恼,站在那里思惟:“好吧,现在我就用手段让他般涅槃,这样他的心愿就会落空,而我的心愿就能实现。”这样想后,魔来到世尊面前,站在一边,以“请世尊现在般涅槃吧”等话请求世尊入般涅槃。针对这件事,才说了“在第八个七日”等话。其中,“今天”是指舍弃寿命行的那一天。世尊虽然知道他的意图,却没有说破,只是表明般涅槃的时机还未到,拒绝了他的请求。因此说“现在还不行”等话。巴利
168.Anatthe niyojento guṇamāraṇena māreti, virāgavibandhanena vā jātinimittatāya tattha tattha jātaṃ jātaṃ mārento viya hotīti ‘‘māretīti māro’’ti vuttaṃ. Ativiya pāpatāya pāpimā. Kaṇhadhammehi samannāgato kaṇho. Virāgādiguṇānaṃ antakaraṇato antako. Sattānaṃ anatthāvahapaṭipattiṃ na muccatīti namuci. Attano mārapāsena pamatte bandhati, pamattā vā bandhū etassāti pamattabandhu. Sattamasattāhato paraṃ satta ahāni sandhāyāha ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’ti na pana pallaṅkasattāhādi viya niyatakiccassa aṭṭhamasattāhassa nāma labbhanato. Sattamasattāhassa hi parato ajapālanigrodhamūle mahābrahmuno, sakkassa ca devarañño paṭiññātadhammadesanaṃ bhagavantaṃ ñatvā ‘‘idāni satte dhammadesanāya mama visayaṃ atikkamāpessatī’’ti sañjātadomanasso hutvā ṭhito cintesi ‘‘handa dānāhaṃ naṃ upāyena parinibbāpessāmi, evamassa manoratho aññathattaṃ gamissati, mama ca manoratho ijjhissatī’’ti . Evaṃ pana cintetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṃ antaṃ ṭhito ‘‘parinibbātu dāni bhante bhagavā’’tiādinā parinibbānaṃ yāci, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’tiādi. Tattha ajjāti āyusaṅkhārossajjanadivasaṃ sandhāyāha. Bhagavā cassa abhisandhiṃ jānantopi taṃ anāvikatvā parinibbānassa akālabhāvameva pakāsento yācanaṃ paṭikkhipi. Tenāha ‘‘na tāvāha’’ntiādi.
以道而聪慧:是指通过证悟圣谛的聪慧而聪慧。同样地已调伏:是指以道断除烦恼而调伏。同样地自信:唯由证得圣道,在导师的教法中达到无所畏,因而自信;也就是说,因为远离了见、疑等令人退缩的不善法,所以达到了自信的状态。凡是依靠所闻之法而能从轮回之苦中出离的,这里用最胜的指示方式称之为“所闻”,因此说“以三藏之故”。三藏的集合就是三藏,或者三藏就是三藏,三藏即是三藏,依此而说。正是那:指那个作为应当听闻的对象而被说为“所闻”的三藏本身。法:指教理之法。受持:像放在金器中的狮子乳一样使其不坏失,以熟练掌握、善巧运作的状态受持于心。这样依教理之法显示了多闻持法的状态之后,为了同样依证悟之法来显示它,便说了“或者”等词。于圣法:指道果之法,或者九种出世间法。成为随法:指为了证得而成为随顺之法。随顺道:这里指的是观法,或者六种清净。随法:指对于上述修行道路随顺的、素净的少欲等法。行戒:指受持、保持不辍的戒。或者,因为道果法随其后而称为随法,即导向出起的观,这观的持行就是行戒。自己师尊之说:指自己师尊,也就是正等正觉者之说。以教导有天神的世界的行为,所以是导师,即世尊。他的说,就是四圣谛的教导。巴利
Maggavasena viyattāti saccasampaṭivedhaveyyattiyena byattā. Tatheva vinītāti maggavasena kilesānaṃ samucchedavinayanena vinītā. Tathā visāradāti ariyamaggādhigameneva satthusāsane vesārajjappattiyā visāradā , sārajjakarānaṃ diṭṭhivicikicchādipāpadhammānaṃ vigamena visāradabhāvaṃ pattāti attho. Yassa sutassa vasena vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇaṃ sambhavati, taṃ idha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ‘‘suta’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘tepiṭakavasenā’’ti. Tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ samūho tepiṭakaṃ, tīṇi vā piṭakāni tipiṭakaṃ, tipiṭakameva tepiṭakaṃ, tassa vasena. Tamevāti yaṃ taṃ tepiṭakaṃ sotabbabhāvena ‘‘suta’’nti vuttaṃ, tameva. Dhammanti pariyattidhammaṃ. Dhārentīti suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittasīhavasaṃ viya avinassantaṃ katvā suppaguṇasuppavattibhāvena dhārenti hadaye ṭhapenti. Iti pariyattidhammavasena bahussutadhammadharabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni paṭivedhadhammavasenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ariyadhammassāti maggaphaladhammassa, navavidhassāpi vā lokuttaradhammassa. Anudhammabhūtanti adhigamāya anurūpadhammabhūtaṃ. Anucchavikapaṭipadanti ca tameva vipassanādhammamāha, chabbidhā visuddhiyo vā. Anudhammanti tassā yathāvuttapaṭipadāya anurūpaṃ abhisallekhitaṃ appicchatādidhammaṃ. Caraṇasīlāti samādāya pavattanasīlā. Anu maggaphaladhammo etissāti vā anudhammā, vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā, tassā caraṇasīlā. Attano ācariyavādanti attano ācariyassa sammāsambuddhassa vādaṃ. Sadevakassa lokassa ācārasikkhāpanena ācariyo, bhagavā. Tassa vādo, catusaccadesanā.
“将宣说”:是指从一开始就讲说,意思是按照自己受持的次第,让其他人也受持、掌握。“将开示”:是指将诵读并正确地让人领悟巴利圣典的文句。“将令知”:是指将使人了知,也就是标示出来。“将安立”:是指以种种方式确立,也就是阐明。“将开显”:是指使公开显露。“将分别”:是指加以分析说明。“将显了”:是指把不明显、深奥的变得明白易见。“连同法”:这里“法”这个词是原因的代称,就像“于因之智是法辨析”等句那样,所以注释说“以有因、有理由的话”。“有教诫神变”:是指具有出离的作用,也就是像驳倒对方的主张、确立自己的主张那样,以因由和实例成就所证得的义理而说法。因此注释说“将教导能导出轮回之法”,意思是启发九种出世间法。在这里,以“将令知”等六个词显示了六个义句,而前面两个词则显示了六个文句。到此为止,以注释的方法归纳显示了三藏佛语。《导论》中确实这样说:“十二句之经,那全部既是文句,也是意义。”巴利
Ācikkhissantīti ādito kathessanti, attanā uggahitaniyāmena pare uggaṇhāpessantīti attho. Desessantīti vācessanti, pāḷiṃ sammā pabodhessantīti attho. Paññāpessantīti pajānāpessanti, saṅkāpessantīti attho. Paṭṭhapessantīti pakārehi ṭhapessanti, pakāsessantīti attho. Vivarissantīti vivaṭaṃ karissanti. Vibhajissantīti vibhattaṃ karissanti. Uttāniṃ karissantīti anuttānaṃ gambhīraṃ uttānaṃ pākaṭaṃ karissanti. Saha dhammenāti ettha dhamma-saddo kāraṇapariyāyo ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 270) viyāti āha ‘‘sahetukena sakāraṇena vacanenā’’ti. Sappāṭihāriyanti sanissaraṇaṃ , yathā paravādaṃ bhañjitvā sakavādo patiṭṭhahati, evaṃ hetudāharaṇehi yathādhigatamatthaṃ sampādetvā dhammaṃ kathessanti. Tenāha ‘‘niyyānikaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessantī’’ti, navavidhaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ pabodhessantīti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘paññāpessantī’’tiādīhi chahi padehi cha atthapadāni dassitāni, ādito pana dvīhi padehi cha byañjanapadāni. Ettāvatā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayena saṅgahetvā dassitaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ nettiyaṃ ‘‘dvādasapadāni suttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ byañjanañca attho cā’’ti (netti. saṅkhāre).
被三学所包含,就是指被增上戒学等三学所摄。整个教法与梵行,就是指毫无遗漏的、作为导师教法的最高修行。成就,就是真正地增长。以禅那之乐来说,就是通过那些比丘各自证得的禅那之乐。达到增长,就是进入殊胜微妙的状态,达到全面的圆满。就像枝叶繁茂一样,以神通的成就,凭借种种神通使教法增长达到顶点。以安住来说,就是安住之义,也就是达到了稳固的状态。以通达使众人获益,就是利益众多的人,所以称为“众人”。因此说“以众人现观之故”。广大而普遍地生起,或广大而普遍地达到,就是“广布”。因此说“具足一切相状……达到”。善开示,就是真正地、以初善等的方式善加开示。巴利
Sikkhattayasaṅgahitanti adhisīlasikkhādisikkhattayasaṅgahaṇaṃ. Sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyanti anavasesaṃ satthusāsanabhūtaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ. Samiddhanti sammadeva vaḍḍhitaṃ. Jhānassādavasenāti tehi tehi bhikkhūhi samadhigatajhānasukhavasena. Vuddhippattanti uḷārapaṇītabhāvagamanena sabbaso parivuddhiṃ upagataṃ. Sabbapāliphullaṃ viya abhiññāsampattivasena abhiññāsampadāhi sāsanābhivuddhiyā matthakappattito. Patiṭṭhitavasenāti patiṭṭhānavasena, patiṭṭhappattiyāti attho. Paṭivedhavasena bahuno janassa hitanti bāhujaññaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bahujanābhisamayavasenā’’ti. Puthu puthulaṃ bhūtaṃ jātaṃ, puthu vā puthuttaṃ bhūtaṃ pattanti puthubhūtaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbākāra…pe… patta’’nti. Suṭṭhu pakāsitanti suṭṭhu sammadeva ādikalyāṇādibhāvena paveditaṃ.
关于舍弃寿行的解说巴利
Āyusaṅkhāraossajjanavaṇṇanā
169 把正念好好建立起来之后:这个由身体等部分构成、被称为“有身”的苦重担,我已经背了这么久,现在不该再背了。为了卸下它,我在更长的时间里积聚了圣道的资粮,如今这圣道我已经通达,因此这些身体等法,都已依不净等相被如实遍知。我把四种正念都如实地、好好地安立在各自的所缘上。以智慧划定之后:因为这个被称为“有身”的苦重担,其背负的目的——自利,早已在菩提树下完成;而利他——调伏佛陀所应度化的众生,则应当完成,如今只需三个月就能圆满完成。所以他说:“我将在卫塞月满月日般涅槃。”这样以佛陀的智慧划定,从一切方面作出决定之后。他舍掉了寿行:对于作为寿命、生命的造作者的果等至法,他决意“我不再入此定”,从而舍掉了它;通过舍掉它,也就等于对由它所造作的生命行决意“我不再让它继续”,从而舍掉了它。因此注释中说“在那里”等等。大地震动之所以巨大,既因为震动处所广大,也因为震动方式宏大。其中,为了显示由于处所广大而地动之大,说“那时确实……震动”。而那只是作为诞生领域的十千世界,不是随便哪一个世界,而是在大誓愿、大诞生等时也震动的那一个。那时为什么也只是那么大范围在震动呢?因为从最初起,它就被作为诞生领域而确定下来。而确定它,应当理解为法尔如是。因为过去诸佛的诞生领域也正好只有那么大。正如所说:“十千世界无声无息、无有纷乱……大海鼓荡,十千世界震动”等等。以水为边界,用六种方式震动,令未离贪者恐惧,所以是“令人恐惧的”,正是这令人恐惧的,所以说“令人生畏”。天鼓:只是天鼓之声的另一种说法。这里并不是指有什么鼓叫做“天鼓”,而是指以异常现象而出现的、虚空中发出的响声。因此说“天”等等。天,就是云。因为云散之后虚空无雨,发出被称为“干雷”的声音时,就叫做天鼓。因此说“天发出干雷之声”。巴利
169.Satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvāti ayaṃ kāyādivibhāgo attabhāvasaññito dukkhabhāro mayā ettakaṃ kālaṃ vahito, idāni pana na vahitabbo, etassa avahanatthaṃ cirataraṃ kālaṃ ariyamaggasambhāro sambhato, svāyaṃ ariyamaggo paṭividdho, yato ime kāyādayo asubhādito sammadeva pariññātā, catubbidhampi sammāsatiṃ yathātathaṃ visaye suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitaṃ katvā. Ñāṇena paricchinditvāti yasmā imassa attabhāvasaññitassa dukkhabhārassa vahane payojanabhūtaṃ attahitaṃ tāva mahābodhimūle eva parisamāpitaṃ, parahitaṃ pana buddhaveneyyavinayanaṃ parisamāpitabbaṃ, taṃ idāni māsattayeneva parisamāpanaṃ pāpuṇissati, tasmā abhāsi ‘‘visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ parinibbāyissāmī’’ti, evaṃ buddhañāṇena paricchinditvā sabbabhāgena nicchayaṃ katvā. Āyusaṅkhāraṃ vissajjīti āyuno jīvitassa abhisaṅkhārakaṃ phalasamāpattidhammaṃ ‘‘na samāpajjissāmī’’ti vissajji taṃvissajjaneneva tena abhisaṅkhariyamānaṃ jīvitasaṅkhāraṃ ‘‘nappavattessāmī’’ti vissajji. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Ṭhānamahantatāyapi pavattiākāramahantatāyapi mahanto pathavīkampo. Tattha ṭhānamahantatāya bhūmicālassa mahattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tadā kira…pe… kampitthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana jātikkhettabhūtā dasasahassī lokadhātu eva, na yā kāci, yā mahābhinīhāramahājātiādīsupi kampittha. Tadāpi tattikāya eva kampane kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ? Jātikkhettabhāvena tasseva ādito pariggahassa katattā. Pariggahakaraṇaṃ cassa dhammatāvasena veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi purimabuddhānampi tāvatakameva jātikkhettaṃ ahosi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘dasasahassī lokadhātū, nissaddā honti nirākulā…pe… mahāsamuddo ābhujati, dasasahassī pakampatī’’ti ca ādi (bu. vaṃ. 84-91). Udakapariyantaṃ katvā chappakārapavedhanena avītarāge bhiṃsetīti bhiṃsano, so eva bhiṃsanakoti āha ‘‘bhayajanako’’ti. Devabheriyoti devadundubhisaddassa pariyāyavacanamattaṃ. Na cettha kāci bherī ‘‘devadundubhī’’ti adhippetā, atha kho uppātabhāvena labbhamāno ākāsagato nigghosasaddo. Tenāha ‘‘devo’’tiādi. Devoti megho. Tassa hi acchabhāvena ākāsassa vassābhāvena sukkhagajjitasaññite sadde niccharante devadundubhisamaññā. Tenāha ‘‘devo sukkhagajjitaṃ gajjī’’ti.
世尊因为喜悦的冲力而说出感兴语:他心里生起欢喜,想道:“这个叫做‘有身’的苦重担,我已经背负了这么久,现在不久就要把它放下了。”于是,他完全顺着自己的本性,说出了这首由喜悦冲力所引发的感兴语。为了表明在这样说出感兴语的时候,另一层含义也同时得到了说明,注释里才提出“为何……”等等的问题。巴利
Pītivegavissaṭṭhanti ‘‘evaṃ cirataraṃ kālaṃ vahito ayaṃ attabhāvasaññito dukkhabhāro, idāni na cirasseva nikkhipissatī’’ti sañjātasomanasso bhagavā sabhāveneva pītivegavissaṭṭhaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Evaṃ pana udānentena ayampi attho sādhito hotīti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“可称量”一词,是为了表明“称量”这个词是从被称量的对象(业)的角度来说的,所以才说“已称量”。由于力量微弱,它是有局限的。正因为它被四周分割、削减,所以被称为“微小”。
由于能镇伏对立面、持续时间长久,以及果报广大,所以它不可称量、没有局限。前面笼统地说广大心为“不可称量”,是基于某些理由;而那些理由在无色界定中比在色界定中更为殊胜,所以说“无色界定是不可称量的”,另一类则说为“可称量”。
在三类业中,果报微小、低劣的,就是“可称量”;果报广大、殊胜的,就是“不可称量”。至于其中居中的那类,则应分为低劣与殊胜两种,分别归入这两类中。应当依照“低劣三法解释”中所说的方法,确定果报的多寡,再据此理解“可称量”与“不可称量”的区别。
“能出生”:因为从它出生,所以叫“所生”,因此说“作为产生之因的”。
“专精于内”:通过观照自身相续中的诸法,以及反复修习所缘,而变得专注欢喜。
“有果报的”:它作为生起的果报,只给予现行的果报,从“有果报”的意义上说是“所生”。但它不是欲界等的有行(造作)。为了显示与那有行的区别,先说“所生”,然后说“有行”。
“已舍断”:以圣道舍断。就像铠甲一样,它包裹着自身而住立;因为是从自身生起的,所以是“自身生起”的烦恼,他断除了烦恼。为了显示断除烦恼时同时舍断相应的业,他说了这两者的原因:“专精于内,得定。”巴利
Tulīyatīti tulanti tula-saddo kammasādhanoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tulita’’nti vuttaṃ. Appānubhāvatāya paricchinnaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ parito khaṇḍitabhāvena ‘‘paritta’’nti vuccati. Paṭipakkhavikkhambhanato dīghasantānatāya, vipulaphalatāya ca na tulaṃ na paricchinnaṃ. Yehi kāraṇehi pubbe avisesato mahaggataṃ ‘‘atula’’nti vuttaṃ, tāni kāraṇāni rūpāvacarato āruppassa sātisayāni vijjantīti ‘‘arūpāvacaraṃ atula’’nti vuttaṃ, itarañca ‘‘tula’’nti, appavipākaṃ tīsupi kammesu yaṃ tanuvipākaṃ hīnaṃ, taṃ tulaṃ. Bahuvipākanti yaṃ mahāvipākaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ atulaṃ. Yaṃ panettha majjhimaṃ, taṃ hīnaṃ, ukkaṭṭhanti dvidhā bhinditvā dvīsu bhāgesu pakkhipitabbaṃ. Hīnattikavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva appabahuvipākataṃ niddhāretvā tassa vasena tulātulabhāvo veditabbo. Sambhavati etasmāti sambhavoti āha ‘‘sambhavassa hetubhūta’’nti. Niyakajjhattaratoti sasantānadhammesu vipassanāvasena, gocarāsevanāya ca nirato. Savipākaṃ samānaṃ pavattivipākamattadāyikammaṃ savipākaṭṭhena sambhavaṃ. Na ca taṃ kāmādibhavābhisaṅkhārakanti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘sambhava’’nti vatvā ‘‘bhavasaṅkhāra’’nti vuttaṃ. Ossajjīti ariyamaggena avassajji . Kavacaṃ viya attabhāvaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ attani sambhūtattā attasambhavaṃ kilesañca abhindīti kilesabhedasahabhāvikammossajjanaṃ dassento tadubhayassa kāraṇaṃ avoca ‘‘ajjhattarato samāhito’’ti.
“在审察、在衡量时”:他以“生起是恐怖,不生起是安稳”等说法来进行审量。为了把前面“在审察、在衡量”等简略语句所说的含义详细展示出来,他先讲了“五蕴”等内容,然后具体说明了舍断“有行”的方式。接着又通过“如是”等语,以总结的方式显示了《感兴语注释》开头已经说过的法义。巴利
Tīrentoti ‘‘uppādo bhayaṃ, anuppādo khema’’ntiādinā vīmaṃsanto. ‘‘Tulento tīrento’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcakkhandhā’’ti ādiṃ vatvā bhavasaṅkhārassa avassajjanākāraṃ sarūpato dassesi. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā pana udānavaṇṇanāyaṃ ādito vuttamatthaṃ nigamanavasena dassesi.
大地的震动释义巴利
Mahābhūmicālavaṇṇanā
171 171. 关于“yaṃ”(何者)一词,有人理解为工具格、依处格或主格,于是说“yena samayena, yasmiṃ vā samaye”(在某个时候,或在某个时候)。所谓“上举风”(ukkhepakavātā),是指截断了持水风之后,从它停住的地方吹起的风。“六十……乃至……厚”这句话,只是就那股风的高度来说的;至于长度和宽度,它甚至能截断量等一万个轮围世界的持水风。所谓“于空中”(ākāse),是指先前由风所安立的地方。所谓“再次的风”(puna vāto),是说上举风这样运作并消失之后,持水风又重新结合、执持,以支撑的方式、以结合扩展的方式执持,使水不致下沉。由此,水向上涌起(tato udakaṃ uggacchati):由于那样结合执持,被那股风支撑的水就向上升起、向上移动。确实是有发生的(hotiyeva):是说时时间断地发生。因广大(bahalabhāvena):是因为大地的巨大。因为整个大地当时正在下沉、上升,所以震动就不明显了。巴利
171. Yanti karaṇe vā adhikaraṇe vā paccattavacananti adhippāyena āha ‘‘yena samayena, yasmiṃ vā samaye’’ti. Ukkhepakavātāti udakasandhārakavātaṃ upacchinditvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato khepakavātā. ‘‘Saṭṭhi…pe… bahala’’nti idaṃ tassa vātassa ubbedhappamāṇameva gahetvā vuttaṃ, āyāmavitthārato pana dasasahassacakkavāḷappamāṇampi udakasandhārakavātaṃ upacchindatiyeva. Ākāseti pubbe vātena patiṭṭhitokāse. Puna vātoti ukkhepakavāte tathākatvā vigate udakasandhārakavāto puna ābandhitvāgaṇhāti yathā taṃ udakaṃ na bhassati, evaṃ utthambhentaṃ ābandhanavitānavasena bandhitvā gaṇhāti. Tato udakaṃ uggacchatīti tato ābandhitvā gahaṇato tena vātena utthambhitaṃ udakaṃ uggacchati upari gacchati. Hotiyevāti antarantarā hotiyeva. Bahalabhāvenāti mahāpathaviyā mahantabhāvena. Sakalā hi mahāpathavī tadā oggacchati, uggacchati ca, tasmā kampanaṃ na paññāyati.
“成就所欲之事”就是指心中想要的事情得以实现,也就是应当体验到的自在圆满等。所谓“小”,是指刚刚获得一点点,还没有很好地修习。这样一来,修习的力量就不强,所以说“虚弱”。这里其实是借“想”的名义来说修习。“无量”是指修习已经纯熟、完善。这种修习稳固而更加坚定,所以说“强大”。所谓“小地想,无量水想”,这只是随顺教说而已。应当知道这里的意旨是:如果水想修习得好,大地震动就能轻松成就。令放逸于天界享乐的天王帝释心生警醒,或者观察自己刚刚证得的神通力。大目犍连长老令宫殿震动是众所周知的,所以这里不提,为了显示僧伽罗克希达沙弥令宫殿震动的事,才说“据说这位尊者……”等。“有腐臭气味”是指他有腐败的气味,因此叫“腐臭者”。以这种腐臭气味,就像凭气味知道是母胎所生一样,以臭气为头,意思是说这个孩子极其臭秽。巴利
Ijjhanassāti icchitatthasijjhanassa. Anubhavitabbassaissariyasampattiādikassa. Parittāti paṭiladdhamattā nātisubhāvitā. Tathā ca bhāvanā balavatī na hotīti āha ‘‘dubbalā’’ti. Saññāsīsena hi bhāvanā vuttā. Appamāṇāti paguṇā subhāvitā. Sā hi thirā daḷhatarā hotīti āha ‘‘balavā’’ti. ‘‘Parittā pathavīsaññā, appamāṇā āposaññā’’ti desanāmattameva, āposaññāya pana subhāvitāya pathavīkampo sukheneva ijjhatīti ayamettha adhippāyo veditabbo. Saṃvejento dibbasampattiyā pamattaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ. Vīmaṃsanto vā tāvadeva samadhigataṃ attano iddhibalaṃ. Mahāmoggallānattherassa pāsādakampanaṃ pākaṭanti taṃ anāmasitvā saṅgharakkhitasāmaṇerassa pāsādakampanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so kirāyasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pūtimisso gandho etassāti pūtigandho, tena pūtigandheneva adhigatamātukucchisambhavaṃ viya gandheneva sīsena, ativiya dārako evāti attho.
老师说,是指老师的教导。所谓神通造作,就是应当以对治神通种类等的方式来实现;但他自己没有正确掌握方法上的善巧,所以还没有真正学会,因此说:你还没学会就上战场了。用“漂浮”这个词,是说明把整座宫殿的地基都变成水,然后让所决意的宫殿在那里漂浮。接着用譬喻说明决意的步骤,说:孩子……你要知道。其中,盘中小饼就是淋浇做成的饼。做这种饼时,先在盘里放一点面粉,然后逐渐增加,最后把饼的四周边缘收拢清楚,做成一块四周界限分明的饼。同样,他在这里用譬喻教导说:依水遍的力量,决意“愿宫殿所在之处成为水”时,应当这样决意:从宫殿四周直到边界,全都成为水。巴利
Ācariyanti ācariyūpadesaṃ. Iddhābhisaṅkhāro nāma iddhividhappaṭipakkhādībhāvena icchitabbo, so ca upāye kosallassa attanā na sammā uggahitattā na tāva sikkhitoti āha ‘‘asikkhitvāva yuddhaṃ paviṭṭhosī’’ti. ‘‘Pilavanta’’nti iminā sakalameva pāsādavatthuṃ udakaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhātabbapāsādova tattha pilavatīti dasseti. Adhiṭṭhānakkamaṃ pana upamāya dassento ‘‘tāta…pe… jānāhī’’ti āha. Tattha kapallakapūvanti āsittakapūvaṃ, taṃ pacantā kapāle paṭhamaṃ kiñci piṭṭhaṃ ṭhapetvā anukkamena vaḍḍhetvā antantena paricchindanti pūvaṃ samantato paricchinnaṃ katvā ṭhapenti, evaṃ ‘‘āpokasiṇavasena ‘pāsādena patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ udakaṃ hotū’ti adhiṭṭhahanto samantato pāsādassa yāva pariyantā yathā udakaṃ hoti, tathā adhiṭṭhātabba’’nti upamāya upadisati.
《大本经》里已经说到这一点:先说了“比丘们,这是法性:当菩萨从兜率天身殁、入母胎时”,接着又说“这一万世界震动、强烈震动、剧烈震动”;同样,说了“比丘们,这是法性:当菩萨从母胎出来时”,接着又说“这一万世界震动、强烈震动、剧烈震动”。既然在《大本经》中,大菩萨入胎和诞生这两处都依法性说到了大地震动,那么其余四种场合的大地震动,也同样只是依法性而有的。这就是《大本经》在意义上已经说到的,也正是(论主)的意趣所在。巴利
Mahāpadānevuttamevāti ‘‘dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.18) vatvā ‘‘ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.18), tathā ‘‘dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, yadā bodhisatto mātukucchimhā nikkhamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.30) vatvā ‘‘ayañca dasasahassī lokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.32) ca mahābodhisattassa gabbhokkantiyaṃ, abhijātiyañca dhammatāvasena mahāpadānepathavīkampassa vuttattā itaresupi catūsu ṭhānesu pathavīkampo dhammatāvasenevāti mahāpadāneatthato vuttaṃ evāti adhippāyo.
现在,为了说明这些大地震动在原因和发生方式上的区别,所以说了“在这些之中……”等话。以界的扰动:就是由被称为上举界的风界发生扰动。以神通威力:是指依靠智慧神通或业报神通的威力,也就是威德力。以福德威力:是指由福德的威力,也就是大菩萨的福德之力。以智慧威力:是指由证悟智慧的威力。以给予喝彩的方式:正如在成正觉时,大地被不共他人的证悟智慧威力所冲击而震动;同样,在说法时,大地也被不共他人的说法智慧威力所冲击而震动,而这对于如来来说,就像是在给予喝彩一样。因此说“以给予喝彩的方式”。巴利
Idāni nesaṃ pathavīkampanaṃ kāraṇato, pavattiākārato ca vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iti imesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dhātukopenāti ukkhepakadhātusaṅkhātāya vāyodhātuyā pakopena. Iddhānubhāvenāti ñāṇiddhiyā vā kammavipākajiddhiyā vā pabhāvena, tejenāti attho. Puññatejenāti puññānubhāvena, mahābodhisattassa puññabalenāti attho. Ñāṇatejenāti paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvena. Sādhukāradānavasenāti yathā anaññasādhāraṇena paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvena abhihatā mahāpathavī abhisambodhiyaṃ akampittha, evaṃ anaññasādhāraṇena desanāñāṇānubhāvena abhihatā mahāpathavī akampittha, taṃ panassā sādhukāradānaṃ viya hotīti ‘‘sādhukāradānavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
世尊的色身具备三十二大人相和八十种随形好,庄严微妙;他的法身圆满具足一切行相清净的戒蕴等功德宝,达到了福德广大、威力广大、神通广大、智慧广大的最高顶点,是无与伦比者、无等等者、无可匹敌者——阿拉汉、正自觉者。他虽然有本事让称为“自身”的五蕴存留一劫或一劫有余,却以厌离有为法的殊胜智慧,把五蕴看得连一根草都不如,毫不留恋地以舍寿行的方式舍弃了寿命。大地被这种威力的冲击所震动,在舍寿行时发生了震动,而这就像是世尊悲悯本性的自然流露,所以说“以悲悯自性”。因为世尊在般涅槃时,次第进入了二十四万亿种等至,其间还不断插入果等至;在这之前,他生起了极其猛利、锐利、勇猛的观智,心中想道:“我长久以来积集的、不共他人的、达到最高顶点的智慧资粮,以及所证得的无上解脱,今天这个到达顶点、究竟终结、无余涅槃界终于要实现了。”世尊因此生起了更加深广的喜悦,由于喜的遍满等功德之力而变得更加殊胜,生起了他人所不共的殊胜智慧。正是依靠这种由等至之力所滋养的殊胜智慧的威力,才说出了“这两份钵食同果同报”等话。因此,大地被这种威力所冲击而震动。而那时大地的震动,就好像是世尊发出的悲泣之声,所以说“第八种是以哭号的方式”。巴利
Yena pana bhagavā asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitadvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa- (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.198; ma. ni. 2.385) vicitrarūpakāyo sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanasamiddhidhammakāyo puññamahattathāmamahattayasamahaāiddhimahattapaññāmahattānaṃ paramukkaṃsagato asamo asamasamo appaṭipuggalo arahaṃ sammāsambuddho attano attabhāvasaññitaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ kappaṃ vā kappāvasesaṃ vā ṭhapetuṃ samatthopi saṅkhatadhammaṃ paṭijigucchanākārappavattena ñāṇavisesena tiṇāyapi amaññamāno āyusaṅkhārossajjanavidhinā nirapekkho ossajji. Tadanubhāvābhihatā mahāpathavī āyusaṅkhārossajjane akampittha, taṃ panassā kāruññasabhāvasaṇṭhitā viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāruññasabhāvenā’’ti . Yasmā bhagavā parinibbānasamaye catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo samāpajji antarantarā phalasamāpattisamāpajjanena, tassa pubbabhāge sātisayaṃ tikkhaṃ sūraṃ vipassanāñāṇañca pavattesi, ‘‘yadatthañca mayā evaṃ sucirakālaṃ anaññasādhāraṇo paramukkaṃsagato ñāṇasambhāro sambhato, anuttaro ca vimokkho samadhigato, tassa vata me sikhāppattaphalabhūtā accantaniṭṭhā anupādisesanibbānadhātu ajja samijjhatī’’ti bhiyyo ativiya somanassappattassa bhagavato pītivipphārādiguṇavipulatarānubhāvo parehi asādhāraṇañāṇātisayo udapādi, yassa samāpattibalasamupabrūhitassa ñāṇātisayassa ānubhāvaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dveme piṇḍapātā samasamaphalā samasamavipākā’’tiādi (udā. 75), tasmā tassa ānubhāvena samabhihatā mahāpathavī akampittha. Taṃ panassā tassaṃ velāyaṃ ārodanākārappatti viya hotīti ‘‘aṭṭhamo ārodanenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了详细解释前面简要说的义理,就说了“入母胎时”等话。这里所说的义理,就是“以随喜供养之力”等话所表达的意思。说到“以地神之力”——就像大海有海神一样,据说大地也有主管神。当有这样的因缘时,随着那位天神的心念,这大地就会震动、大震、剧烈颤动,就像随着风云天神的心念,风就吹起来,随着冷云、热云、雨云天神的心念,就出现寒冷、炎热等现象。比如在毗舍佉月圆那天,世间怙主为了证得正等觉坐在菩提树下,为了摧破前来障碍的魔军——巴利
Idāni saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘mātukucchiṃ okkamante’’tiādimāha. Ayaṃ panatthoti ‘‘sādhukāradānavasenā’’tiādinā vutto attho. Pathavīdevatāya vasenāti ettha samuddadevatā viya mahāpathaviyā adhidevatā kira nāma atthi. Tādise kāraṇe sati tassā cittavasena ayaṃ mahāpathavī saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhati, yathā vātavalāhakadevatānaṃ cittavasena vātā vāyanti, sītuṇhaabbhavassavalāhakadevatānaṃ cittavasena sītādayo bhavanti. Tathā hi visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ abhisambodhiatthaṃ bodhirukkhamūle nisinnassa lokanāthassa antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ mārabalaṃ vidhamituṃ –
这大地没有心识,也不知道快乐和痛苦;
它也因为我的布施之力,震动了七次。巴利
‘‘Acetanāyaṃ pathavī, aviññāya sukhaṃ dukhaṃ; Sāpi dānabalā mayhaṃ, sattakkhattuṃ pakampathā’’ti. (cariyā. 1.124) –
话音刚落,大地就裂开了,把魔连同他的随从一起掀翻。这里说的是喝彩等事。虽然大地没有心识,但按照前面说的道理,还是可以说法性使然。而法性,从意义上说就是法的本性,也就是福德法或智慧法的威神力本性。这一切都已经审察过了,因此才有:巴利
Vacanasamanantaraṃ mahāpathavī bhijjitvā saparisaṃ māraṃ parivattesi. Etanti sādhukāradānādi. Yadipi natthi acetanattā, dhammatāvasena pana vuttanayena siyāti sakkā vattuṃ. Dhammatā pana atthato dhammasabhāvo, so puññadhammassa vā ñāṇadhammassa vā ānubhāvasabhāvoti. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ vicāritameva, evañca katvā –
如实观照这些法的人,能看清它们各自的自性、作用与特征;
依靠法的威力,大地和一万个世界都震动了。巴利
‘‘Ime dhamme sammasato, sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇe; Dhammatejena vasudhā, dasasahassī pakampathā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 1.166);
开头这句话也就成立了。巴利
Ādi vacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti.
“已说例证”的意思是:把已经说明的义理交代清楚,也就是总结。“至此”是指:通过地动等的发生,以及显示世尊就是地动的原因这两方面来说。长老以余类智推断:“今天世尊必定已经舍弃了寿行。”因为那时长老会这样审察:这次地震不是地界扰乱引起的,因为找不到扰乱的相状;在佛陀时代,外道中也没有具有如此大威神力的仙人;教内的人也不可能不禀告导师就做出这种事;其余五种原因此时都不可能;而且这次地震极其恐怖,令人毛发竖立。因此,他依据余类智说:“今天世尊舍弃了寿行。”巴利
Niddiṭṭhanidassananti niddiṭṭhassa atthassa niyyātanaṃ, nigamananti attho. Ettāvatāti pathavīkampādiuppādajananena ceva pathavīkampassa bhagavato hetunidassanena ca. ‘‘Addhā ajja bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭho’’ti sallakkhesi pārisesañāyena. Evañhi tadā thero tamatthaṃ vīmaṃseyya nāyaṃ bhūmikampo dhātuppakopahetuko tassa apaññāyamānarūpattā, bāhirakopi isi evaṃ mahānubhāvo buddhakāle natthi, sāsanikopi satthu anārocetvā evaṃ karonto nāma natthi, sesānaṃ pañcannaṃ idāni asambhavo, evaṃ bhūmikampo cāyaṃ mahābhiṃsanako salomahaṃso ahosi, tasmā pārisesato āha ‘‘ajja bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭhoti sallakkhesī’’ti.
八种众的注释巴利
Aṭṭhaparisavaṇṇanā
172 没有给机会,是指当长老以“尊者,请世尊暂且住世一劫”这类话请求时,没有给他开口的机会。接着,他把其他几组八法也合在一起,从八因开始,又按众、胜处、解脱这三方面收入三组八法,然后说出“确实有这八种……”等话。有些人说:“这是为了不让阿难长老生起悲伤,让他分心。”他们认为,如果突然说出来,可能会生起强烈的悲伤。巴利
172.Okāsaṃ adatvāti ‘‘tiṭṭhatu bhante bhagavā kappa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.178) nayappavattāya therassa āyācanāya avasaraṃ adatvā. Aññānipi aṭṭhakāni sampiṇḍento hetuaṭṭhakato aññāni parisābhibhāyatanavimokkhavasena tīṇi aṭṭhakāni saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘aṭṭha kho imā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Āyasmato ānandassa sokuppattiṃ pariharanto vikkhepaṃ karonto’’ti keci sahasā bhaṇite balavasoko uppajjeyyāti.
“集会”:因为应当集合到一起,或者因为大家聚拢过来,所以叫“集会”,也就是大众。以频婆娑罗王为首的集会,就叫频婆娑罗集会。另外两种集会也是这样。频婆娑罗……等等,乃至与集会等相类似的刹帝利众,应当这样连接理解。在其他轮围世界里,导师也同样会去刹帝利众等集会那里。
“谈说”:一开始导师和那些人一起说话,就是谈说。
“对谈”:一问一答地交谈,就是对谈。
“法谈”:与法相应的提问和反问、讨论法义,就是法谈。
“身形”:是依据身形来说的,因为“色”这个词有时指身形,就像“化作大身象王之身”等语句里那样。
“那些”:这个词同时指向两个方面——“他们的相状和形体,就像导师的身相一样,但对他们来说只是这样显现而已”。也不是说世尊戴着宝石耳环,应当这样理解。
“声断”:指声音像裂成两半一样。
“伽伽声”:指沙哑的声音。
“别的语言”:指与那些众生自己的语言不同的另一种话。
“思察”:就是思考。
“为什么……而说法”这句话,是带着这样的用意:先让他们认识自己之后再说法,他们就会生起更殊胜的净信,难道不是吗?对于那些不先认识自己、一听法就能生起净信的人,就不必先让他们认识自己再说法,导师是针对这类人这样做的。这里说明其用意,所以说“为了熏习”。即使这样听到了,也就是说,即使说法者不为人所知、来处也不为人所知,所听到的法本身,由于自己内心法的善法性,也会成为未来听法者的助缘。巴利
Samāgantabbato, samāgacchatīti vā samāgamo, parisā. Bimbisārapamukho samāgamo bimbisārasamāgamo. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Bimbisāra…pe… samāgamādisadisaṃ khattiyaparisanti yojanā. Aññesu cakkavāḷesupi labbhateyeva satthu khattiyaparisādiupasaṅkamanaṃ. Ādito tehi saddhiṃ satthu bhāsanaṃ ālāpo. Kathanapaṭikathanaṃ sallāpo. Dhammupasañhitā pucchā paṭipucchā dhammasākacchā. Saṇṭhānaṃ paṭicca kathanaṃ saṇṭhānapariyāyattā vaṇṇa-saddassa ‘‘mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) viya. ‘‘Tesa’’nti padaṃ ubhayapadāpekkhaṃ ‘‘tesampi lakkhaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ viya satthu sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ kevalaṃ paññāyati evā’’ti. Nāpi āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalo bhagavā hotīti yojanā. Chinnassarāti dvidhābhūtassarā. Gaggarassarāti jajjaritassarā. Bhāsantaranti tesaṃ sattānaṃ bhāsato aññaṃ bhāsaṃ. Vīmaṃsāti cintanā. ‘‘Kimatthaṃ…pe… desetī’’ti idaṃ nanu attānaṃ jānāpetvā dhamme kathite tesaṃ sātisayo pasādo hotīti iminā adhippāyena vuttaṃ? Yesaṃ attānaṃ ajānāpetvāva dhamme kathite pasādo hoti, na jānāpetvā, tādise sandhāya satthā tathā karoti. Tattha payojanamāha ‘‘vāsanatthāyā’’ti. Evaṃ sutopīti evaṃ aviññātadesako aviññātāgamanopi suto dhammo attano dhammasudhammatāyeva anāgate paccayo hoti suṇantassa.
以“阿难”等开头的这些内容,本来就是未收入结集的巴利圣典,这里正是这样显示的。这个道理,也适用于此后诸如此类的地方。巴利
‘‘Ānandā’’tiādiko saṅgītianāruḷho pāḷidhammo eva tathā dassito. Esa nayo ito paresupi evarūpesu ṭhānesu.
八胜处的解释巴利
Aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanavaṇṇanā
173 能征服,就是“胜”,指的是遍作或智。以“胜”为处,就是胜处,也就是禅那。或者,以应当被征服的所缘为处,就是胜处。因为能征服所缘,所以叫“胜”;又因为这种处是修行者殊胜之乐的依止,或者因为它属于意处和法处,所以连同相应法的禅那也叫胜处。因此说“征服的原因”等等。这里说的“这些”,就是指那些名为胜处的禅那。“由于补特伽罗的智更殊胜”这一句,在两种情况下都适用。怎么适用呢?以对立的方式征服对立之法,以及由于补特伽罗的智更殊胜而征服所缘。确实,就像以慧力征服所缘一样,也能征服对立面。巴利
173. Abhibhavatīti abhibhu, parikammaṃ, ñāṇaṃ vā. Abhibhu āyatanaṃ etassāti abhibhāyatanaṃ, jhānaṃ. Abhibhavitabbaṃ vā ārammaṇasaṅkhātaṃ āyatanaṃ etassāti abhibhāyatanaṃ. Ārammaṇābhibhavanato abhibhu ca taṃ āyatanañca yogino sukhavisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, manāyatanadhammāyatanabhāvato vātipi sasampayuttaṃ jhānaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘abhibhavanakāraṇānī’’tiādi. Tāni hīti abhibhāyatanasaññitāni jhānāni. ‘‘Puggalassa ñāṇuttariyatāyā’’ti idaṃ ubhayatthāpi yojetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Paṭipakkhabhāvena paccanīkadhamme abhibhavanti puggalassa ñāṇuttariyatāya ārammaṇāni abhibhavanti. Ñāṇabaleneva hi ārammaṇābhibhavanaṃ viya paṭipakkhābhibhavo pīti.
依靠遍作,才是内色想,不是依靠安止。因为以似相为所缘的安止不可能以内境为对象;而那种通过内遍作得到的遍相,确实是不清净的,不像通过外遍作得到的那样清净。巴利
Parikammavasena ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī, na appanāvasena. Na hi paṭibhāganimittārammaṇā appanā ajjhattavisayā sambhavati, taṃ pana ajjhattaparikammavasena laddhaṃ kasiṇanimittaṃ avisuddhameva hoti, na bahiddhāparikammavasena laddhaṃ viya visuddhaṃ.
“小”是指按照所获得的样子,像筛盘那样的大小。因此说“未增大的”。即使是在有颜色作意的情况下,这里也只是依“小”这一方面而称为胜处。因为在这里,“小”正是征服的原因。无论有颜色作意还是没有,胜处的修习只有锐利智慧的人才能成就,不是其他人能做到的,所以说“智慧最胜的人”。所谓“征服之后而入定”,这里的征服和入定,是指在证得近行禅那之后,紧接着就生起安止禅那,因此说“在这里,与相生起的同时就达到安止”。“与相生起同时”这句话,是在说明没有安止间隔期这一特征。即使是被称为“速通者”的人,也只有智慧最胜者才能修习胜处。这里“在这里”是指在此时这个相上。“达到安止”是指把修习引导到安止。巴利
Parittānīti yathāladdhāni suppasarāvamattāni. Tenāha ‘‘avaḍḍhitānī’’ti. Parittavasenevāti vaṇṇavasena ābhoge vijjamānepi parittavaseneva idaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ vuttaṃ. Parittatā hettha abhibhavanassa kāraṇaṃ. Vaṇṇābhoge satipi asatipi abhibhāyatanabhāvanā nāma tikkhapaññasseva sambhavati, na itarassāti āha ‘‘ñāṇuttariko puggalo’’ti. Abhibhavitvā samāpajjatīti ettha abhibhavanaṃ, samāpajjanañca upacārajjhānādhigamasamanantarameva appanājhānuppādananti āha ‘‘saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetī’’ti. Saha nimittuppādenāti ca appanāparivāsābhāvassa lakkhaṇaṃ vacanametaṃ. Yo ‘‘khippābhiñño’’ti vuccati, tatopi ñāṇuttarasseva abhibhāyatanabhāvanā. Etthāti etasmiṃ nimitte. Appanaṃ pāpetīti bhāvanaṃ appanaṃ neti.
在这里,有些人这样说:当近行禅那已经生起,以它作为所缘,会有两三个低层次的速行心路过程转起,这些就属于近行禅那一类;紧接着,经过有分心的间隔,不必再重复修习近行,安止就生起了;就在所缘相生起的同时,就达到了安止。这只是他们自己的看法而已。因为,并不是经过有分心间隔的遍作修习就能产生安止;也不像广大禅那和无量禅那那样,对近行禅那一定需要加以观察。所以,是在证得近行禅那之后,经过几个有分心,才达到安止,因此说“在这里,与所缘相生起的同时就达到安止”。而“与所缘相生起的同时”这句话,是表达意趣的说法,不是字面上的确定含义;它的意趣应当按前面所说的方式来理解,因为在安止当中,那时不可能有这样的作意。应当这样理解:从定中出来之后,依靠前分修习的力量,把握住禅那刹那所生起的征服状态,作意才生起。不过在《阿毗达摩注》中说:“以此说明了他的前分作意。”有人问:在安止当中并没有那样的作意,那为什么说“以禅那想”呢?回答说:“有征服……等等。”巴利
Ettha ca keci ‘‘uppanne upacārajjhāne taṃ ārabbha ye heṭṭhimantena dve tayo javanavārā pavattanti, te upacārajjhānapakkhikā eva, tadanantarañca bhavaṅgaparivāsena, upacārāsevanāya ca vinā appanā hoti, saha nimittuppādeneva appanaṃ pāpetī’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Na hi parivāsitaparikammena appanāvāro icchito, nāpi mahaggatappamāṇajjhānesu viya upacārajjhāne ekantato paccavekkhaṇā icchitabbā, tasmā upacārajjhānādhigamanato paraṃ katipayabhavaṅgacittāvasāne appanaṃ pāpuṇanto ‘‘saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetī’’ti vutto. Saha nimittuppādenevāti ca adhippāyikamidaṃ vacanaṃ, na nītatthaṃ, adhippāyo vuttanayeneva veditabbo, na antosamāpattiyaṃ tadā tathārūpassa ābhogassa asambhavato. Samāpattito vuṭṭhitassa ābhogo pubbabhāgabhāvanāyavasena jhānakkhaṇe pavattaṃ abhibhavanākāraṃ gahetvā pavattoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘iminā tassa pubbābhogo kathito’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 204) vuttaṃ. Antosamāpattiyaṃ tathā ābhogābhāve kasmā ‘‘jhānasaññāyapī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘abhibhavana…pe… atthī’’ti.
“已增大的量”意思是“广大的量”,不是通过一指、两指等方式把它增大,因为在这里那样增大是不可能的。所以他说“大的”。“食增”是指把食器加大之后布施的食物,意思是一个人在一个座位上应当吃的一份食物的一半。巴利
Vaḍḍhitappamāṇānīti vipulappamāṇānīti attho, na ekaṅguladvaṅgulādivasena vaḍḍhiṃ pāpitānīti tathā vaḍḍhanassevettha asambhavato. Tenāha ‘‘mahantānī’’ti. Bhattavaḍḍhitakanti bhuñjanabhājanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dinnabhattaṃ, ekāsane purisena bhuñjitabbabhattato upaḍḍhabhattanti attho.
对色的想,就是色想。谁有这种想,谁就是有色想的人;没有色想的人,就是无色想的人。这里是拿想作为首要因素来讲禅那。在这里,让色想不再生起,就是还没得到它。巴利
Rūpe saññā rūpasaññā, sā assa atthīti rūpasaññī, na rūpasaññī arūpasaññī, saññāsīsena jhānaṃ vadati. Rūpasaññāya anuppādanaṃ evettha alābhitā.
「在外生起」是指在外部所依处当中生起。可是在阿毗达摩里,因为四种胜处是这样被引述的:「内无色想者见外色,那些是细小的、好色丑色的……(中略)……无量的、好色丑色的」(《法集论》220),所以在《阿毗达摩注疏》(《法集论注》204)中先提出这样的质疑:「为什么不像经里所说的那样,说『内有色想者一人见外色,那些是细小的』等等,而在这里的四种胜处中都只说『内无色想』呢?」接着说出理由:「因为内色不能被征服。」然后说明:无论在经里还是在论里,需要被征服的都只是外色,所以那些外色必须明确规定出来,因此两处都提到了它们。至于「内有色想者」这一句,那只是世尊说法时的一种善巧变化罢了。在这里,所有不带颜色作意的、以及带颜色作意的细小色,都被称为「细小的好色丑色」;同样,无量的就被称为「无量的好色丑色」。这当中确实有一个理趣:在征服了细小色之后,如果那些色偶尔以颜色的角度被作意,这就被称为征服了「好色丑色」。因为经中的教导是带理趣的说法。然而在阿毗达摩(《法集论》222)中,因为是究竟无余的教导,所以把带颜色作意的与不带颜色作意的分开来说了,同样地也把细小色与无量色分开。确实,经与论这两处各有其征服的差别。同样,这里因为是带理趣的教说,所以诸解脱也有「征服」的理趣义,因此由「内有色想」等句,在第一、第二胜处中摄入第一解脱,在第三、第四胜处中摄入第二解脱,在色胜处中摄入第三解脱——都是依「征服」的运作而摄入的。然而在阿毗达摩中,因为是究竟无余的教说,为了不相杂乱地显示解脱与胜处,所以略去解脱不谈,单说诸胜处;而一切具解脱作用的禅那,则在解脱的教说中宣说。由此可知:以「内有色想」一语而来的前二胜处,在阿毗达摩的诸胜处中未被提及;而「有色者见诸色」等句,因为是通于一切解脱作用的共通说法——这样便作出了区分。「因为内色不能被征服」这句,是说明为什么任何地方都不说「见内色」、而处处只说「见外色」的原因;借此原因,凡属别有原因者,此处即以此因而说。至于阿毗达摩(《法集论》223)中「内无色想」那样的说法,其原因唯是说法的善巧变化,不应为它另寻他因——注疏如此显示。而内色之所以不能被征服,是因为它们不像外色那样现起。至于说法的善巧,则应依如前所说的区分来理解,因为它是随顺所化众生的意乐而现存的带理趣说法。问:既然由「好色丑色」一语已经成立含摄,是否就不必再说青等色胜处了呢?答:不然,因为对于以青等色为所修者,正是那青等之相本身才是征服的因由。因为对这些清净或不清净的颜色而言,其「细小」或「无量」并非征服的因由,而正是其青等之相才是。又,在这些细小等遍处色中,这些胜处是随各人何种性行而成就的——为了显示此义,所以说「在这些当中」等下文。巴利
Bahiddhāvauppannanti bahiddhā vatthusmiṃyeva uppannaṃ. Abhidhamme pana ‘‘ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni…pe… appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti (dha. sa. 220) evaṃ catunnaṃ abhibhāyatanānaṃ āgatattā abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 204) ‘‘kasmā pana ‘yathā suttante ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittānītiādi vuttaṃ, evaṃ avatvā idha catūsupi abhibhāyatanesu ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññitāva vuttā’ti codanaṃ katvā ‘ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyato’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā, tattha vā hi idha vā bahiddhā rūpāneva abhibhavitabbāni, tasmā tāni niyamato vattabbānīti tatrāpi idhāpi vuttāni. ‘Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’ti idaṃ pana satthu desanāvilāsamattamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca vaṇṇābhogarahitāni, sahitāni ca sabbāni parittāni ‘‘parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti vuttāni, tathā appamāṇāni ‘‘appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti. Atthi hi so pariyāyo parittāni abhibhuyya tāni ce kadāci vaṇṇavasena ābhujitāni honti, suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni abhibhuyyāti. Pariyāyakathā hi suttantadesanāti. Abhidhamme (dha. sa. 222) pana nippariyāyadesanattā vaṇṇābhogarahitāni visuṃ vuttāni, tathā sahitāni. Atthi hi ubhayattha abhibhavanavisesoti. Tathā idha pariyāyadesanattā vimokkhānampi abhibhavanapariyāyo atthīti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’tiādinā paṭhamadutiyaabhibhāyatanesu paṭhamavimokkho, tatiyacatutthaabhibhāyatanesu dutiyavimokkho, vaṇṇābhibhāyatanesu tatiyavimokkho ca abhibhavanappavattito saṅgahito. Abhidhamme pana nippariyāyadesanattā vimokkhābhibhāyatanāni asaṅkarato dassetuṃ vimokkhe vajjetvā abhibhāyatanāni kathitāni ; sabbāni ca vimokkhakiccāni jhānāni vimokkhadesanāyaṃ vuttāni. Tadetaṃ ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’ti āgatassa abhibhāyatanadvayassa abhidhamme abhibhāyatanesu avacanato ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnañca sabbavimokkhakiccasādhāraṇavacanabhāvato vavatthānaṃ katanti viññāyati. ‘‘Ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyato’’ti idaṃ katthacipi ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpāni passatī’’ti avatvā sabbattha yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti, tassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, tena yaṃ aññahetukaṃ, taṃ tena hetunā vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana desanāvilāsahetukaṃ ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññitāya eva abhidhamme (dha. sa. 223) vacanaṃ, na tassa aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ maggitabbanti dasseti. Ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyatā ca tesaṃ bahiddhā rūpānaṃ viya abhūtattā. Desanāvilāso ca yathāvuttavavatthānavasena veditabbo veneyyajjhāsayavasena vijjamānapariyāyakathābhāvato. ‘‘Suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti eteneva siddhattā na nīlādi abhibhāyatanāni vattabbānīti ce? Taṃ na, nīlādīsu katādhikārānaṃ nīlādibhāvasseva abhibhavanakāraṇattā. Na hi tesaṃ parisuddhāparisuddhavaṇṇānaṃ parittatā, appamāṇatā vā abhibhavanakāraṇaṃ, atha kho nīlādibhāvo evāti. Etesu ca parittādikasiṇarūpesu yaṃ yaṃ caritassa imāni abhibhāyatanāni ijjhanti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imesu panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
从总摄的角度来说,是指把整个青色的青颜色、青显色、青光耀这三者作为共同特征来把握。从颜色的角度来说,是指从自性颜色的角度。从显色的角度来说,是指从可见性的角度,也就是在眼识等识的运作过程中能够被执取的角度。从光耀的角度来说,是指它具有光辉、能够照耀的角度。Umāpuppha 就是亚麻花。因为不存在颜色混杂,所以它纯粹就是青色。Bārāṇasisambhava 是指产于波罗奈城。巴利
Sabbasaṅgāhakavasenāti sakalanīlavaṇṇanīlanidassananīlanibhāsānaṃ sādhāraṇavasena. Vaṇṇavasenāti sabhāvavaṇṇavasena. Nidassanavasenāti passitabbatāvasena cakkhuviññāṇādiviññāṇavīthiyā gahetabbatāvasena. Obhāsavasenāti sappabhāsatāya avabhāsanavasena. Umāpupphanti atasipupphaṃ. Nīlameva hoti vaṇṇasaṅkarābhāvato. Bārāṇasisambhavanti bārāṇasiyaṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ.
有些外道在观察无量、极其广大的遍相时,可能会生起恐惧:“这难道不是征服、笼罩、抓住了整个世界吗?”但如来并没有这样的恐惧或怯畏。之所以举出这些,正是为了显示如来无所畏惧的状态。巴利
Ekaccassa ito bāhirakassa appamāṇaṃ ativitthāritaṃ kasiṇanimittaṃ olokentassa bhayaṃ uppajjeyya ‘‘kiṃ nu kho idaṃ sakalaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā gaṇhātī’’ti, tathāgatassa pana tādisaṃ bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā natthīti abhītabhāvadassanatthameva ānītāni.
八解脱的注释巴利
Aṭṭhavimokkhavaṇṇanā
174 因为下面已经按意义分析过了,所以这里的意思本来就很容易懂。对某些人来说,光是“解脱”这个说法就会带来恐惧,因为他们喜欢轮回。但如来即使成就了解脱并安住其中,也没有这种恐惧。所以举出这些解脱,正是为了显示如来无所畏惧。巴利
174.Uttānatthāyeva heṭṭhā atthato vibhattattā. Ekaccassa vimokkhoti ghosopi bhayāvaho vaṭṭābhiratabhāvato, tathāgatassa pana vimokkhe upasampajja viharatopi taṃ natthīti abhītabhāvadassanatthameva ānītāni.
阿难请求的因缘故事的注释巴利
Ānandayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
178 菩提是指一切知智。因为一切知智的证得以四道智的证得为根本,所以把它说成“四道智的证得”。所谓“如此说过的状态”,就是指“阿难,如来若愿意,可以住世一劫或一劫有余”这样已经宣说过的情况。巴利
178.Bodhīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘catumaggañāṇapaṭivedha’’ntveva vuttaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇappaṭivedhassa taṃmūlakattā. Evaṃ vuttabhāvanti ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno ānanda tathāgato kappaṃ vā tiṭṭheyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.166) evaṃ vuttabhāvaṃ.
179 那个粗显的相虽然已经修成了,但因为他当时的心被魔罗缠住了,所以既没有透彻地证知它,也没有清楚地辨认出它。巴利
179.Tampi oḷārikanimittaṃ kataṃ tassa mārena pariyuṭṭhitacetaso na paṭividdhaṃ na sallakkhitaṃ.
183 “等”是指像这样的朋友、同僚、伙伴。因为值得被喜爱,所以叫“可爱”;因为能使心增长,所以叫“可意”。“由出生”:指随着出生的方式而分离。“异相”:指各自分开、互不相属的状态。“由死而分离”:因为死亡之后不再回到那个生命形态,所以叫分离。“由有而异相”:因为执取另一种存在,就从原来的样子变成另外的样子,比如“欲界众生变成色界众生”等等,也可以套用“人变成天人”等等来说。“何处可得?”意思是:在这五蕴相续之中,哪里、什么地方能得到“已经出生的……愿不坏灭”呢?因为根本不存在这样的原因,所以说“无有此事”。这样一来,连如来的身体都是稀有、未曾有之法,更何况其他众生的身体呢?这就是这段话的意思。“将收回它”这样的事也不可能,因为已经让念现前,以智慧抉择而舍弃了寿行,而且佛陀应做的事已经完成。在这里,三个月之后就不再有所应度化的众生了。巴利
183.Ādikehīti evamādīhi mittāmaccasuhajjāhi. Piyāyitabbato piyehi. Manavaḍḍhanato manāpehi. Jātiyāti jātianurūpagamanena. Nānābhāvo visuṃbhāvo asambaddhabhāvo. Maraṇena vinābhāvoti cutiyā tenattabhāvena apunarāvattanato vippayogo. Bhavena aññathābhāvoti bhavantaraggahaṇena purimākārato aññākāratā ‘‘kāmāvacarasatto rūpāvacaro hotī’’tiādinā, tatthāpi ‘‘manusso devo hotī’’tiādināpi yojetabbo. Kutettha labbhāti kuto kuhiṃ kismiṃ nāma ṭhāne ettha etasmiṃ khandhappavatte ‘‘yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ…pe… mā palujjī’’ti laddhuṃ sakkā. Na sakkā eva tādisassa kāraṇassa abhāvatoti āha ‘‘netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti. Evaṃ acchariyabbhutadhammaṃ tathāgatassāpi sarīraṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana aññesanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Paccāvamissatī’’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā ñāṇena paricchinditvā āyusaṅkhārānaṃ ossaṭṭhattā, buddhakiccassa ca pariyosāpitattā. Na hettha māsattayato paraṃ buddhaveneyyā labbhantīti.
184 “教法长久住立”是指纯粹由具备各种条件的圣道法而言,所以他说“一切都是依世间与出世间来说的”,因为离开了世间的戒、定、慧,就不可能证得出世间法。巴利
184. Sāsanassa ciraṭṭhiti nāma sasambhārehi ariyamaggadhammehi kevalehīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ lokiyalokuttaravaseneva kathita’’nti lokiyāhi sīlasamādhipaññāhi vinā lokuttaradhammasamadhigamassa asambhavato.
象王回望的注释巴利
Nāgāpalokitavaṇṇanā
186 象王回望的意思是:像象王那样回望,也就是像大象王回头的姿态那样回望。触到的意思是碰触到。如同钩端一样,意思是像钩子那样彼此钩连、附着在一起而站立。紧密相连的意思是彼此连结为一体。因此,由于颈骨像整块一样紧密相连,不只是颈骨,除了肩关节等十二个大关节和手指关节之外,所有其他关节也都紧密相连地存在着,正因如此,诸佛具有相当于千亿普通大象之力的身力。他把身体转向面对毗舍离城的方向,就像为了避开刺丛而转向迦毗罗卫城时那样。如果是这样,那为什么还叫它象王回望呢?这是根据他当时的心意来说的。世尊确实是以象王回望的方式想要回望,但凭借功德的威力,他所站立的地方随之转了过来,因此,这才被称为象王回望。巴利
186.Nāgāpalokitanti nāgassa viya apalokitaṃ, hatthināgassa apalokanasadisaṃ apalokananti attho. Āhaccāti phusitvā. Aṅkusakalaggāni viyāti aṅkusakāni viya aññamaññasmiṃ laggāni āsattāni hutvā ṭhitāni. Ekābaddhānīti aññamaññaṃ ekato ābaddhāni. Tasmāti gīvaṭṭhīnaṃ ekagghanānaṃ viya ekābaddhabhāvena, na kevalaṃ gīvaṭṭhīnaṃyeva, atha kho sabbānipi tāni buddhānaṃ ṭhapetvā bāhusandhiādikā dvādasa mahāsandhiyo, aṅgulisandhiyo ca itarasandhīsu ekābaddhāni hutvā ṭhitāni, yato nesaṃ pakatihatthīnaṃ koṭisahassabalappamāṇaṃ kāyabalaṃ hoti. Vesālinagarābhimukhaṃ akāsi kaṇṭakaparivattane viya kapilanagarābhimukhaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ taṃ nāgāpalokitaṃ nāma jātaṃ? Tadajjhāsayaṃ upādāya. Bhagavā hi nāgāpalokitavaseneva apaloketukāmo jāto, puññānubhāvena panassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ parivatti, tena taṃ ‘‘nāgāpalokitaṃ’’ tveva vuccati.
阿难,这是如来最后一次见毗舍离。这句话并不是在说回望毗舍离有什么必然的理由,因为理由并不止一个,这只是如实陈述而已。在以清净道的方式说明了那一点之后,为了指出这里还有别的回望理由,便说了“难道不是……”等话。那一切都只是最后一次的见——因为世尊要渐次前往拘尸那罗入般涅槃,所以从一处又一处地离去。用“并非稀奇”这句话,是为了避免把上面说的理解为理由只有一种,那只是一种澄清。而为了显示这里真正不错的原因,又说了“此外……”等话。因为世尊并不是带着对毗舍离的依恋而回望,而是以“我此行不再回来”这一示现,为了众人的利益、众人的安乐、对世间的悲悯而回望。因此说:“此外,毗舍离的国王们……”等。巴利
‘‘Idaṃ pacchimakaṃ ānanda tathāgatassa vesāliyā dassana’’nti nayidaṃ vesāliyā apalokanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ anekantikattā, bhūtakathanamattaṃ panetaṃ. Maggasodhanavasena taṃ dassetvā aññadevettha apalokanakāraṇaṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ pacchimadassanameva anukkamena kusināraṃ gantvā parinibbātukāmatāya tato tato nikkhantattā. ‘‘Anacchariyattā’’ti iminā yathāvuttaṃ anekantikattaṃ pariharati, tayidaṃ sodhanamattaṃ. Idaṃ panettha aviparītaṃ kāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na hi bhagavā sāpekkho vesāliṃ apalokesi, ‘‘idaṃ pana me gamanaṃ apunarāgamana’’nti dassanamukhena bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya apalokesi. Tenāha ‘‘apica vesālirājāno’’tiādi.
“终结者”:在自他相续中,能摧毁、灭尽整个轮回之苦。他具足五种眼——佛眼、法眼、天眼、肉眼和一切眼,所以称为“有眼者”。因为连习气在内的烦恼都已彻底断除,所以以殊胜的烦恼般涅槃而称为“已寂灭”。巴利
Antakaroti sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa sakasantāne, parasantāne ca vināsakaro abhāvakaro. Buddhacakkhudhammacakkhudibbacakkhumaṃsacakkhusamantacakkhusaṅkhātehi pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā. Savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ samucchinnattā sātisayaṃ kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.
四大教法的注释巴利
Catumahāpadesavaṇṇanā
187 “大处所”就是指广大的地方,也就是安立法的广大依据处。在这些地方把法安立起来后,就能毫无疑惑地确定下来。那这些地方是什么呢?就是具有传承、能贯通经教等特质的依据。在第二种解释里,“依据”指的是用来判定某人所说的“法”的根据,比如有人说:“贤友,这是我从世尊面前亲耳听来的……”等等。那这个根据到底是什么呢?就是像前面说的,看它是否能贯通经教等等。如果是这样,那为什么会有四种呢?因为法的传承有两位导师:佛陀和声闻弟子。而在声闻弟子中,又按僧团、众多长老、一位长老分成三种。这样一来,以“你们从我这里受持的法”这种方式来指认时,由于指认对象不同,就成了四种。所以经文说:“贤友,这是我从世尊面前亲耳听来的……”等等。同样,《导论》中也这样说:“有四种大依据:以佛陀为依据、以僧团为依据、以众多长老为依据、以一位长老为依据。这就是四种大依据。”以佛陀为依据的,就叫佛陀依据;其余几种也是这样类推。因此说:“以佛陀等……中略……大依据。”巴利
187.Mahāokāseti mahante okāse. Mahantāni dhammassa patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni. Yesu patiṭṭhāpito dhammo nicchīyati asandehato, kāni pana tāni? Āgamanavisiṭṭhāni suttotaraṇādīni. Dutiyavikappe apadisantīti apadesā, ‘‘sammukhā metaṃ āvuso bhagavato suta’’ntiādinā kenaci ābhatassa ‘‘dhammo’’ti vinicchinane kāraṇaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Tassa yathābhatassa suttotaraṇādi eva. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ cattāroti? Yasmā dhammassa dve samparāyā satthā, sāvakā ca, tesu ca sāvakā saṅghagaṇapuggalavasena tividhā , evaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ mayā yaṃ dhammo paṭiggahito’’ti apadisitabbānaṃ bhedena cattāro. Tenāha ‘‘sammukhā me taṃ āvuso bhagavato suta’’ntiādi. Tathā ca vuttaṃ nettiyaṃ ‘‘cattāro mahāpadesā buddhāpadeso saṅghāpadeso sambahulattherāpadeso ekattherāpadeso. Ime cattāro mahāpadesā’’ti (netti. 18) buddho apadeso etassāti buddhāpadeso. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tenāha ‘‘buddhādayo…pe… mahākāraṇānī’’ti.
188 不应欢喜,就是不应接受。所谓接受一部著作,就是听闻它,所以说“不应听闻”。词与音节,就是词和音节,意思是义理之词和音节之词。义理通过这些表达出来,所以叫词;字母等是音节之词。因为要被表达,所以叫词;能作陈述等的义理之词也是词。不过在注释书里,有人说“‘所谓以词为体的音节’只是指音节之词”,这种说法不对。因为能表达意义的叫音节,即音节之词;由它们所表达的对象也叫音节,即义理之词,这样才概括了两个方面。在此处,指在那人所带来经文的这个地方。诵出了圣典,指纯粹诵出了巴利语的法句。说出了义理,指诵出圣典后,陈述解释了它的含义。说明了连结,指说明了已开始的教导与后面教导之间的贯通关系,也就是说明了其中的关联。说明了前后关系,指说明了前后不相违背,以及其中的殊胜之处,陈述并阐明了这些。这样,把巴利语的法句等好好把握、正确理解之后,再好好地学习受持,所以说“好好取来”。应当放入经中,指以智慧深入经中再使之渡越,而那种深入再渡越,在这里就是深入、进入其中,所以说“应当放入经中”。对照而显示,就是对照显示,所以说“应当在律中对照”。巴利
188.Nevaabhinanditabbanti na sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Ganthassa sampaṭicchanaṃ nāma savananti āha ‘‘na sotabba’’nti. Padabyañjanānīti padāni ca byañjanāni ca, atthapadāni, byañjanapadāni cāti attho. Pajjati attho etehīti padāni, akkharādīni byañjanapadāni. Pajjitabbato padāni, saṅkāsanādīni atthapadāni. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃpana ‘‘‘padasaṅkhātāni byañjanānī’ti byañjanapadāneva vuttānī’’ti keci, taṃ na, atthaṃ byañjentīti byañjanāni, byañjanapadāni, tehi byañjitabbato byañjanāni, atthapadānīti ubhayasaṅgahato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti tenābhatasuttassa imasmiṃ padese. Pāḷi vuttāti kevalo pāḷidhammo pavatto. Attho vuttoti pāḷiyā attho pavatto niddiṭṭho. Anusandhi kathitoti yathāraddhadesanāya, upari desanāya ca anusandhānaṃ kathitaṃ sambandho kathito . Pubbāparaṃ kathitanti pubbenāparaṃ avirujjhanañceva visesādhānañca kathitaṃ pakāsitaṃ. Evaṃ pāḷidhammādīni sammadeva sallakkhetvā gahaṇaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahaṇanti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu gahetvā’’ti. Sutte otāretabbānīti ñāṇena sutte ogāhetvā tāretabbāni, taṃ pana ogāhetvā taraṇaṃ tattha otaraṇaṃ anuppavesanaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutte otāretabbānī’’ti. Saṃsandetvā dassanaṃ sandassananti āha ‘‘vinaye saṃsandetabbānī’’ti.
那么,那部经是什么?律又是什么?为了通过老师们观点分歧的方式来说明这个含义,才说了“在此处……”等话。所谓“律”,指的是《分别》的文本。因为它能指示那称为“论母”的经的含义,所以有资格被称为“经”。由于具有种种理趣和殊胜的理趣,它也是律,即犍度部分的文本。所谓“就这样”,是说当这样来把握经和律时,连律藏也还没有完全涵盖,因为附随篇章没有被包括在内。或者,也可以把经藏和论藏当作“经”,因为它们同样能产生指示含义等作用。所谓“就算这样”,是指按“经藏和论藏是经,律藏是律”这样来区分经和律时,仍然没有穷尽。所谓“还没有穷尽”,是说还没有毫无遗漏地完全涵盖。为什么呢?回答说“因为有不叫经的……”等。意思是,有些佛语如本生等,虽然被结集了,却没有被冠上“经”这个名称,所以按前面所说的方式,三藏并没有被完全包括。至于《经集》《优陀那》《如是语》等,并不像《长部》等那样冠以经名来结集,所以在这里的意图中,它们连同本生等也被包含进去了。至于佛种姓、行藏等没有被收入这里的理由,则需要另行考察,但那样考察又有什么用呢?一切详细的注释方式,都已经通过上座部的立场被否定了。巴利
Kiṃ pana taṃ suttaṃ, ko vā vinayoti vicāraṇāya ācariyānaṃ matibhedamukhena tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vinayoti vibhaṅgapāṭhamāha. So hi mātikāsaññitassa suttassa atthasūcanato ‘‘sutta’’nti vattabbataṃ arahati. Vividhanayattā, visiṭṭhanayattā ca vinayo, khandhakapāṭho. Evanti evaṃ suttavinayesu pariggayhamānesu vinayapiṭakampi na pariyādīyati parivārapāḷiyā asaṅgahitattā. Suttantābhidhammapiṭakāni vā suttaṃ atthasūcanādiatthasambhavato. Evampīti ‘‘suttantābhidhammapiṭakāni suttaṃ, vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayo’’ti evaṃ suttavinayavibhāge vuccamānepi. Na tāva pariyādīyantīti na tāva anavasesato pariggayhanti, kasmāti āha ‘‘asuttanāmakañhī’’tiādi. Yasmā ‘‘sutta’’nti imaṃ nāmaṃ anāropetvā saṅgītampi jātakādibuddhavacanaṃ atthi, tasmā vuttanayena tīṇi piṭakāni na pariyādiṇṇānīti. Suttanipātaudānaitivuttakādīni dīghanikāyādayo viya suttanāmaṃ āropetvā asaṅgītānīti adhippāye panettha jātakādīhi saddhiṃ tānipi gahitāni. Buddhavaṃsacariyāpiṭakānaṃ panettha aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ maggitabbaṃ, kiṃ vā tena magganena? Sabbopāyaṃ vaṇṇanānayo theravādaṃ dassanamukhena paṭikkhitto evāti.
“存在”是指什么存在?这是在说明:不名为“经”的佛语是不存在的。正如在《因缘注释》(《长部义注·第一结集讲释》;《精义宝函·第一结集讲释》)中我们说过:“‘经’是通称,其余的是别称。”那部注释驳斥了这一切之后,以“经就是律”等说法所建立的注释方式,被修正为“这个含义在这里并不是所要表达的”。然后说“然而律是原因”:通过它调伏烦恼,所以叫律,也就是调伏烦恼的方法。而正是这个律能起到那个作用,所以它是原因,因此说“律是原因”。巴利
Atthīti kiṃ atthi, asuttanāmakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ natthi evāti dasseti. Tathā hi nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) amhehi vuttaṃ ‘‘suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare’’ti. Taṃ sabbaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘suttanti vinayo’’tiādinā vuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayaṃ ‘‘nāyamattho idhādhippeto’’ti paṭisodhetvā. Vineti etena kileseti vinayo, kilesavinayanūpāyo, so eva ca naṃ karotīti kāraṇanti āha ‘‘vinayo pana kāraṇa’’nti.
“法”是指教法。“有贪”是指有贪的状态,也就是为了让欲贪和有贪增长。“结缚”是指有的结缚。“积集”是指让轮回增长。“多欲”是指多欲的状态。“不知足”是指不知足的状态。“杂闹”是指与烦恼众、人群众共住。“懈怠”是指懈怠的状态。“难养”是指难以养活。“离欲”是指从整个轮回离染。“离结”是指从欲有等脱离。“损减”是指损减一切轮回,也就是涅槃。“少欲”是指通过资具少欲等方式,彻底断除欲求。“知足”是指具备十二种知足。“远离”是指远离的状态,也就是成就身远离等暂时远离和究竟远离。“发起精进”是指对身体和心的精进加以策励。“易养”是指容易养活。
如此,凡是教法,对于通过受持、忆持、询问、作意而如理修行的人来说,成为避免有贪等状态的原因,并导向离欲等状态,这法一定是这样的。这是律,因为它能正确守护而不堕入恶趣等,因为它调伏烦恼,因为它是导师正等正觉者的教诫和教导,所以你应该受持、知道、通达这一点,这就是它的含义。
指出四圣谛的就是经,所以说“经是指三藏中的佛语”。三藏佛语没有脱离圣谛的。如来以经文语句阐明了调伏贪等的原因,所以说“在调伏贪等这一点上就是律”。巴利
Dhammeti pariyattidhamme. Sarāgāyāti sarāgabhāvāya kāmarāgabhavarāgaparibrūhanāya. Saññogāyāti bhavasaṃyojanāya. Ācayāyāti vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanatthāya. Mahicchatāyāti mahicchabhāvāya. Asantuṭṭhiyāti asantuṭṭhibhāvāya. Saṅgaṇikāyāti kilesasaṅgaṇagaṇasaṅgaṇavihārāya. Kosajjāyāti kusītabhāvāya. Dubbharatāyāti dupposatāya. Virāgāyāti sakalavaṭṭato virajjanatthāya. Visaññogāyāti kāmabhavādīhi visaṃyujjanatthāya. Apacayāyāti sabbassāpi vaṭṭassa apacayanāya, nibbānāyāti attho. Appicchatāyāti paccayappicchatādivasena sabbaso icchāpagamāya. Santuṭṭhiyāti dvādasavidhasantuṭṭhibhāvāya. Pavivekāyāti pavivittabhāvāya, kāyavivekāditadaṅgavivekādivivekasiddhiyā. Vīriyārambhāyāti kāyikassa ceva, cetasikassa ca vīriyassa paggahaṇatthāya. Subharatāyāti sukhaposanatthāya. Evaṃ yo pariyattidhammo uggahaṇadhāraṇaparipucchāmanasikāravasena yoniso paṭipajjantassa sarāgādibhāvaparivajjanassa kāraṇaṃ hutvā virāgādibhāvāya saṃvattati, ekaṃsato eso dhammo. Eso vinayo, sammadeva apāyādīsu apatanavasena dhāraṇato, kilesānaṃ vinayanato, satthu sammāsambuddhassa ovādānusiṭṭhibhāvato etaṃ satthusāsananti dhāreyyāsi jāneyyāsi, avabujjheyyāsīti attho. Catusaccassa sūcanaṃ suttanti āha ‘‘sutteti tepiṭake buddhavacane’’ti. Tepiṭakañhi buddhavacanaṃ saccavinimuttaṃ natthi. Rāgādivinayanakāraṇaṃ tathāgatena suttapadena pakāsitanti āha ‘‘vinayeti etasmiṃ rāgādivinayakāraṇe’’ti.
这里,“摄受于经”只应理解为被包含在三藏佛语之中,而不是别的意思,所以说“没有以经的次第在任何地方出现”。所谓“刮起树皮”,就像一棵健康的大树还站着时,有人用手段把树皮、木片或外皮刮起来;同样,健康的教法还安立时,仅仅凭着文字表面,就好像已经被包含进去一样,把类似树皮的前后矛盾等过失揭发出来、显示出来。但那样的内容确实属于《密藏》《韦桑答罗》等范畴,因此说“密藏韦桑答罗……可见的意思”。“在调伏贪等中”:指为了调伏贪等。“由于不具备那种特征,所以不被看见、不显现的,就应当舍弃、避开、不采纳。”“在所有情形中”:指在所有情况下。巴利
Sutte osaraṇañcettha tepiṭake buddhavacane pariyāpannatāvaseneva veditabbaṃ, na aññathāti āha ‘‘suttapaṭipāṭiyā katthaci anāgantvā’’ti. Challiṃ uṭṭhapetvāti arogassa mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato upakkamena challiyā sakalikāya, papaṭikāya vā uṭṭhapanaṃ viya arogassa sāsanadhammassa tiṭṭhato byañjanamattena tappariyāpannaṃ viya hutvā challisadisaṃ pubbāparaviruddhatādidosaṃ uṭṭhapetvā paridīpetvā, tādisāni pana ekaṃsato guḷhavessantarādipariyāpannāni hontīti āha ‘‘guḷhavessantara…pe…paññāyantīti attho’’ti . Rāgādivinayeti rāgādīnaṃ vinayanatthe. Tadākāratāya na paññāyamānāni na dissamānāni chaḍḍetabbāni vajjitabbāni na gahetabbāni. Sabbatthāti sabbavāresu.
这里说“在此处”,指的是在解说四大教法的这个地方。虽然前面已经说过“经中有四大教法”等,但现在把没说的部分也一起拿来,以杂谈的方式列出论母。想要了解的义理就是“问”,对它的解答就是“问的解答”。以指示义理等为作用的,就是“经”,即圣典;随顺这部经、与之相合的,就是“随顺经”,也就是大教法。老师们依之解说、注释圣典,这叫“老师之说”,即义注。某位长老自己的见解和主张,叫“己意”。在需要抉择法、判定法的时候,也就是在法需要被判定的时候,这些就是刚才所说的四大教法。依此来衡量法、界定法、判定法,就叫“量”。因此说“凡在这里相合的……”等。“其他的”,指不与四大教法相合的。再说“其他的”,是指把不开许的错当成开许、把开许的排斥掉的情况。巴利
Imasmiṃpana ṭhāneti imasmiṃ mahāpadesaniddesaṭṭhāne. ‘‘Sutte cattāro mahāpadesā’’tiādinā vuttampi avuttena saddhiṃ gahetvā pakiṇṇakakathāya mātikaṃ uddisati. Ñātuṃ icchito attho pañho, tassa vissajjanāni pañhābyākaraṇāni, atthasūcanādiatthena suttaṃ, pāḷi, taṃ suttaṃ anulometi anukūletīti suttānulomaṃ, mahāpadeso. Ācariyā vadanti saṃvaṇṇenti pāḷiṃ etenāti ācariyavādo aṭṭhakathā. Tassa tassa therassa attano eva mati adhippāyoti attanomati. Dhammavinicchaye patteti dhamme vinicchinitabbe upaṭṭhite. Imeti anantaraṃ vuttā cattāro mahāpadesā. Pamīyati dhammo paricchijjati vinicchīyati etenāti pamāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ ettha sametī’’tiādi. Itaranti mahāpadesesu asamentaṃ. Puna itaranti akappiyaṃ anulomentaṃ kappiyaṃ paṭibāhantaṃ sandhāyāha.
应当直接断定地回答、应当解答的,就是“决定回答”。所谓“分别”,是把所问的义理按确定等方式区分开来之后再解答。所谓“反问”,是先反问提问的人,然后再解答。所谓“应当搁置”,是指这三种方式都不能用来解答,所以不解答,把它放在一边。对于“眼是无常的”这个问题,如果是就后一个词(“无常”)的确定来说,就说“应当直接断定地回答”,因为在那里连一丝恒常的可能都没有。如果是就前一个词(“眼”)的确定来说,那就成了应当分别回答的,因为眼和耳在特殊含义和一般含义上并不相同。对这两者(眼和耳)提出“是否相同”的责问时,应当通过反问的方式,用否定和肯定来解答,所以说“如同眼,耳也……这是一个应当反问回答的问题”。“命就是身”这个问题,是问命和身有没有差别。凡是被人用“这个和这个没有差别”来责问的,那个东西在究竟意义上根本找不到,就像在不育之人身上谈论慈氏一样,所以说它应当搁置,因为不该解答而应当放在一边。这四种问答是标准,因为那些问题就应当按这个方式来解答。巴利
Ekaṃseneva byākātabbo vissajjetabboti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo. Vibhajjāti pucchitamatthaṃ avadhāraṇādibhedena vibhajitvā. Paṭipucchāti pucchantaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā. Ṭhapanīyoti tidhāpi avissajjanīyattā ṭhapanīyo byākaraṇaṃ akatvā ṭhapetabbo. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ anicca’’nti pañhe uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃseneva byākātabba’’nti vuttaṃ niccatāya lesassāpi tattha abhāvato. Purimapadāvadhāraṇe pana vibhajjabyākaraṇīyatā cakkhusotesu visesatthasāmaññatthānaṃ asādhāraṇabhāvato. Dvinnaṃ tesaṃ sadisatācodanā paṭipucchanamukheneva byākaraṇīyā paṭikkhepavasena, anuññātavasena ca vissajjitabbatoti āha ‘‘yathā cakkhu, tathā sotaṃ…pe… ayaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho’’ti. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti jīvasarīrānaṃ anaññatāpañho. Yassa yena anaññatācoditā, so eva paramatthato nupalabbhatīti vañjhātanayassa matteyyatākittanasadisoti abyākātabbatāya ṭhapanīyo vuttoti. Imāni cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni pamāṇaṃ teneva nayena tesaṃ pañhānaṃ byākātabbato.
律藏大教法:因为它是按照开许、随顺的方式来安排的,所以从直接意义上就叫作“随顺开许”。但从大教法的性质来看,由于它和那种随顺开许相似,所以在经藏的大教法里,这个“随顺开许”也成了义注中的用语。虽然世尊在各处所说的各种散说教法本身就是义注,但结集法藏的长老们先把三藏结集起来,然后按照对法义的注释,把它编入传诵的次第,因此才被称为“老师之说”,意思是老师们依此来解说、注释巴利圣典。所以说“老师之说就是义注”。在三回结集中被诵出的、作为佛语义释的论说传承,由玛欣德长老带到铜鍱岛,后来铜鍱岛的大长老们为了避免混入其他部派的见解,才用狮子国语言把它记录下来。所谓“己意”,指的就是上座部的传承。“以理趣摄持”,是指从经等当中所获得的理趣来统摄把握。“以随慧”,是指纯粹依循经等而产生的智慧。“自己的辩才”,是指对于那个义理,依照已经说过的理趣,自己在心中自然呈现出来;这样呈现出来的义理,就如实地被说出来。“只应接受契合的”,这句话显示,只要和经典相合,就应当这样从大教法中提取义理。由于文字上的疏漏,老师之说有时也可能和经典不相应,那种就不应该接受;为了说明这一点,才说“老师之说也应当只接受和经典相契合的部分”。自己的辩才,因为是依凭个人而产生的,所以力量最薄弱。即便如此,它如果和经典相合,也可以接受。所谓“在那里”,是指在三次结集中。“唯有传承下来的才是准绳”,这句话表明,只有由大迦叶等大长老们所结集的,才是这里所指的“经”,从而否定了其他自称为“经”的东西。因为这三回结集,正是为了确立这经藏的意义。“那里”,指的是那些应受呵责的经。应当知道,那些“既不被摄入经中,也不与律相应”的说法,因为它根本就不是佛经,所以这里用总结的方式表明:“随顺开许,只应接受和经典相契合的”就是这个意思。在所有这些地方,“不是其余”这句话,应看作是在表明,每一处对取舍的确定,都有其明确的成果。巴利
Vinayamahāpadeso kappiyānulomavidhānato nippariyāyato anulomakappiyaṃ nāma, mahāpadesabhāvena pana taṃsadisatāya suttantamahāpadesesupi ‘‘anulomakappiya’’nti ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāvohāro. Yadipi tattha tattha bhagavatā pavattitapakiṇṇakadesanāva aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthavaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ‘‘ācariyavādo’’ti vuccati ācariyā vadanti saṃvaṇṇenti pāḷiṃ etenāti. Tenāha ‘‘ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā’’ti. Tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷho eva ca buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo mahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ ābhato pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ. Attanomati nāma theravādo. Nayaggāhenāti suttādito labbhamānanayaggahaṇena. Anubuddhiyāti suttādīniyeva anugatabuddhiyā. Attano paṭibhānanti attano eva tassa atthassa vuttanayena upaṭṭhānaṃ, yathāupaṭṭhitā atthā eva tathā vuttā. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā suttena saṃsandati, evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci pāḷiyā asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha ‘‘ācariyavādopi suttena samentoyevagahetabbo’’ti. Sabbadubbalā puggalassa sayaṃ paṭibhānabhāvato. Tathā ca sāpi gahetabbā, kīdisī? Suttena samentā yevāti yojanā. Tāsūti tīsu saṅgītīsu. ‘‘Āgatameva pamāṇa’’nti iminā mahākassapādīhi saṅgītameva ‘‘sutta’’nti idhādhippetanti tadaññassa suttabhāvameva paṭikkhipati. Tadatthā eva hi tisso saṅgītiyo. Tatthāti gārayhasutte. Na ceva sutte osaranti, na ca vinaye sandissantīti veditabbāni tassa asuttabhāvato tena ‘‘anulomakappiyaṃ suttena samentameva gahetabba’’nti vuttaṃ evatthaṃ nigamanavasena nidasseti. Sabbattha ‘‘na itara’’nti vacanaṃ tattha tattha gahitāvadhāraṇaphaladassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
铁匠之子准陀的故事注释巴利
Kammāraputtacundavatthuvaṇṇanā
189 猪软肉:指野猪的嫩肉。因为准陀是入流圣弟子,其他人给世尊和比丘僧团备办食物时,也只备办无可指责的食物,所以这里说“自然肉”。据说,那是指“不太幼小”等所说的特别品质。正因如此,经中说它“又柔软又滑嫩”。因为是嫩肉,又经过特别调理,所以叫“软嫩”。他们投入营养精华时,怀着“这是世尊最后一餐”的想法,是看重这份殊胜功德;而这样一来,由于投入了天界的营养精华,那食物就变得格外沉重了。巴利
189.Sūkaramaddavanti vanavarāhassa mudumaṃsaṃ. Yasmā cundo ariyasāvako sotāpanno, aññe ca bhagavato, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca āhāraṃ paṭiyādentā anavajjameva paṭiyādenti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pavattamaṃsa’’nti. Taṃ kirāti ‘‘nātitaruṇassā’’tiādinā vuttavisesaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘mudu ceva siniddhañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mudumaṃsabhāvato hi abhisaṅkharaṇavisesena ca ‘‘maddava’’nti vuttaṃ. Ojaṃ pakkhipiṃsu ‘‘ayaṃ bhagavato pacchimako āhāro’’ti puññavisesāpekkhāya, taṃ pana tathāpakkhittadibbojatāya garutaraṃ jātaṃ.
别人如果不知道这种食物难以消化,就可能指责说:“他什么都没给任何人,就把它毁掉浪费了。”为了消除别人这样的指责,世尊才用“我并没有……”这样的话发出狮子吼。巴利
Aññe yaṃ dujjīraṃ, taṃ ajānantā ‘‘kassaci adatvā vināsita’’nti upavadeyyunti parūpavādamocanatthaṃ bhagavā ‘‘nāhaṃ ta’’ntiādinā sīhanādaṃ nadati.
190 那么,这个狮子吼难道不是说,那食物在世尊体内也没有好好消化吗?不能这样看。因为应该说“那食物在世尊体内确实好好消化了”,理由是:并没有因为那食物而生起任何不适的变化,而且由其他原因引起的病变反倒变得轻微了。所以经文才说“并非因为吃了……”等等。世尊和其他诸漏尽者受用食物,并不是以生起新受的方式去吃;他们受用食物时,只是把它当作具足八支的食物来吃。如果是这样,那为什么经里说“饭后,他生起了剧烈的病”等等呢?那是因为病恰好是在吃完饭之后生起的,才那样说。而义注里说的“并非因为吃了那顿饭所引起”,这个道理是说:当过去已造作、已累积、已得到机会的业力引生出极猛烈的病时,以那油润柔滑的食物为缘,反而压制住了苦受,所以经文说“如果……”等等。“在所期望的地方”,就是所想去的地方;而他想去那里的意愿,应理解为是希望到那里去调伏那些堪受调伏的众生。偈颂里用“听说”这个词,是要表明:这只是传闻,只是别人的话;那位智者并不是因为食物才遭受病苦的。巴利
190. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ sīhanādo nanu taṃ bhagavatopi sammāpariṇāmaṃ na gatanti? Nayidaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, yasmā ‘‘sammadeva taṃ bhagavato pariṇāmaṃ gata’’nti vattuṃ arahati tappaccayā uppannassa vikārassa abhāvato, aññapaccayassa ca vikārassa mudubhāvaṃ āpāditattā. Tenāha ‘‘na pana bhuttappaccayā’’tiādi. Na hi bhagavā, aññe vā pana khīṇāsavā navavedanuppādanavasena āhāraṃ paribhuñjanti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatameva katvā āhārassa upabhuñjanato. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bhattaṃ bhuttāvissa kharo ābādho uppajjī’’tiādi vuttaṃ? Taṃ bhojanuttarakālaṃ uppannattā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na pana bhuttapaccayā’’ti vutto vāyamattho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Katupacitassa laddhokāsassa kammassa vasena balavatipi roge uppanne garusiniddhabhojanappaccayā vedanāniggaho jāto, tenāha ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādi. Patthitaṭṭhāneti icchitaṭṭhāne, icchā cassa tattha gantvā vinetabbaveneyyāpekkhā daṭṭhabbā. Gāthāyampi ‘‘suta’’nti iminā sutamattaṃ, paresaṃ vacanamattametaṃ, na pana bhojanappaccayā ābādhaṃ phusi dhīroti dasseti.
关于取水的解释巴利
Pānīyāharaṇavaṇṇanā
191 191. 应当通过水的清净状态来理解水的澄澈,所以(注释者)说“有澄净水,就是清净的水”。因为味道甘美、令人愉悦,所以(注释者)说“有甘甜水”。水很浅,而且特别清凉,不是深水,所以(注释者)说“水浅而清凉”。“无泥泞”这一句说明了水色洁白的原因。因为混杂了泥淖、淤泥等杂物,水就会变色;但就水的本性而言,它本来就是白色的。巴利
191. Pasannabhāvena udakassa acchabhāvo veditabboti āha ‘‘acchodakāti pasannodakā’’ti. Sādurasattā sātatāti āha ‘‘madhurodakā’’ti. Tanukameva salilaṃ visesato sītalaṃ, na bahalanti āha ‘‘tanusītalasalilā’’ti. Nikkaddamāti setabhāvassa kāraṇamāha. Paṅkacikkhallādivasena hi udakassa vivaṇṇatā, sabhāvato pana taṃ setavaṇṇaṃ evāti.
补拘娑马罗子的事迹注释巴利
Pukkusamallaputtavatthuvaṇṇanā
192 迎面风:就是迎面吹来的风。长而褐眼:指身材高大,又长着黄褐色的眼睛。正因为他有黄褐色的眼睛,所以被人们称为“阿罗罗”。如是者:指像这样去见、去做、去成为,也就是这般情形。于如是等:用在出现这类不变词组合的任何地方。巴利
192.Dhuravāteti paṭimukhavāte. Dīghapiṅgaloti dīgho hutvā piṅgalacakkhuko. Piṅgalakkhiko hi so ‘‘āḷāro’’ti paññāyittha. Evarūpanti dakkhati karissati bhavissatīti īdisaṃ. Īdisesūti yatra yaṃcāti evarūpanipātasaddayuttaṭṭhānesu.
193 193. “游走”是指闪电从云层中迸发出来,四处游走,所以说“放出即游走”。“九种”是指九种类别。因为在九种类别中,即使只是其中一种闪电,也因归属于这九类而通称为“九种”。这是一种通行的说法,就像“证得八解脱者”这个称呼一样。闪电能使人失去知觉——凡是被它的声响和光焰所覆盖的人,都会如此。“一轮”是指一个圆圈。“切割者”是指闪电像切碎垃圾一样把它割裂开来,所以叫这个名字。“发出伽伽声”是指它发出“伽伽”的声响,这是形容它的回响。“猴头状”是指其形状犹如猴头。“鱼跃状”是指如同鱼在水中跳跃翻腾,呈现出纷乱的形态。“鸡形”是指如同张开翅膀的鸡的形状。犁在耕作时,农夫手握之处有珠状突起,因此那犁被称为“杖珠”,所以“杖珠形”即杖珠的形状。因此说“如犁状”。即使天在下雨,由于大雷具有光明炽盛之性,以水无法比拟,故说“干处”。因此说“能摧毁落处”。巴利
193. Vicarantiyo meghagabbhato niccharantiyo viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘niccharantīsūti vicarantīsū’’ti. Navavidhāyāti navappakārāya. Navasu hi pakāresu ekavidhāpi asani tappariyāpannatāya ‘‘navavidhā’’ tveva vuccati. Īdisī hi esā ruḷhi aṭṭhavimokkhapattipi samaññā viya. Asaññaṃ karoti, yo tassā saddena , tejasā ca ajjhotthaṭo. Ekaṃ cakkanti ekaṃ maṇḍalaṃ. Saṅkāraṃ tīrentī paricchijjantī viya dassetīti saterā. Gaggarāyamānāti gaggarātisaddaṃ karontī, anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Kapisīsāti kapisīsākāravatī. Macchavilolikāti udake paripphandamānamaccho viya viluḷitākārā. Kukkuṭasadisāti pasāritapakkhakukkuṭākārā. Naṅgalassa kassanakāle kassakānaṃ hatthena gahetabbaṭṭhāne maṇikā hoti, taṃ upādāya naṅgalaṃ ‘‘daṇḍamaṇikā’’ti vuccati, tasmā daṇḍamaṇikākārā daṇḍamaṇikā. Tenāha ‘‘naṅgalasadisā’’ti. Deve vassantepi sajotibhūtatāya udakena atemetabbato mahāsani ‘‘sukkhāsanī’’ti vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘patitaṭṭhānaṃ samugghāṭetī’’ti.
所谓“谷壳屋”,就是用谷壳搭成的小屋。据说,当时那里有一大堆稻草,人们把里面的稻草抽出来,弄成一个像大厅一样、适合出家人住的地方,世尊那时就住在那里。而那块打谷场像大厅一样,所以经文说“在打谷大厅”。这里的“于此”是表示原因的处格,所以说“在这个原因上”,意思是由于闪电击倒六个人这件事。“你,尊者”也就是这样的读法。巴利
Bhusāgāraketi bhusamaye agārake. Tattha kira mahantaṃ palālapuñjaṃ abbhantarato palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā sālāsadisaṃ pabbajitānaṃ vasanayoggaṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ, tadā bhagavā tattha vasi, taṃ pana khalamaṇḍalaṃ sālāsadisanti āha ‘‘khalasālāya’’nti. Etthāti hetumhi bhummavacananti āha ‘‘etasmiṃ kāraṇe’’ti, asanipātena channaṃ janānaṃ hatakāraṇeti attho. So tvaṃ bhanteti ayameva vā pāṭho.
194 据说,所谓“金精”,是指佛陀那极其殊胜、极为光明的肤色光辉,就像从天界带来的黄金一样。因此才说“金精般的金色”。接着,他自己提出一个问题:“那位长老拿了那块布吗?”在说明其中的原因时,说出了“虽然……”等话。所谓“正是由于这个原因”,指的是:达到了侍者的最高地位、堵住了别人议论的机会、用那块布供养导师、随顺导师的心意——就是由于这里所说的这四种原因。巴利
194. Siṅgī nāma kira uttamaṃ ativiya pabhassaraṃ buddhānaṃ chavivaṇṇobhāsaṃ devalokato āgatasuvaṇṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘siṅgīsuvaṇṇavaṇṇa’’nti. ‘‘Kiṃ pana thero taṃ gaṇhī’’ti sayameva pucchaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā tattha kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādimāha. Teneva kāraṇenāti upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānassa matthakappatti, paresaṃ vacanokāsapacchedanaṃ, tena vatthena satthu pūjanaṃ, satthu ajjhāsayānuvattananti iminā teneva yathāvuttena catubbidhena kāraṇena.
195 长老立刻就把那块像金精一样颜色的细软布呈给世尊,说:“尊者,请世尊接受我这块细软布,这将会让我长久得到利益和安乐。”世尊接受了,接受之后就直接用了它。因此经里说:“世尊也拿一件作下衣,一件作上衣。”据说,比丘们当时只是把布料的边缘缝好,就算完成了缝制工作,然后交给长老,长老再呈给世尊。“像被拍灭的灯一样”,意思是光亮被压住了,这里的“像”只是一个虚词。因为那两件衣的光彩被世尊身上的光完全盖过,所以它们本身的光亮就显不出来了。“只在内部”,意思就是在里面、在内部。因此才说“但它的外面没有光”。巴利
195. Thero ca tāvadeva taṃ siṅgīvaṇṇaṃ maṭṭhadussaṃ bhagavato upanāmesi ‘‘paṭiggaṇhatu me bhante bhagavā imaṃ maṭṭhadussaṃ, taṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti. Paṭiggahesi bhagavā, paṭiggahetvāva naṃ paribhuñji . Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāpi tato ekaṃ nivāsesi, ekaṃ pārupī’’ti. Tāvadeva kira taṃ bhikkhū ovaṭṭikaraṇamattena tunnakammaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā therassa upanesuṃ, thero bhagavato upanāmesi. Hataccikaṃ viyāti paṭihatappabhaṃ, viya-saddo nipātamattaṃ. Bhagavato hi sarīrappabhāhi abhibhuyyamānā tassa vatthayugassa pabhassaratā nāhosi. Antantenevāti anto anto eva, abbhantarato evāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘bahipanassa pabhā natthī’’ti.
“产生清净的形态”这句话,说明的是:他吃了这种食物之后,并不会因此就生那种病。这种情况只在两个时候发生,因为只有在证得两种涅槃界的时候才会这样。关于“在拐弯处,两棵娑罗树之间”等说法,后面会再讲到。巴利
‘‘Pasannarūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti etenetassa āhārassa bhuttappaccayā na so rogoti ayamattho dīpito. Dvīsu kālesu evaṃ hoti dvinnaṃ nibbānadhātūnaṃ samadhigamasamayabhāvato. Upavattane antarena yamakasālānanti ettha vattabbaṃ parato āgamissati.
196 整块布都变成了金色,因为世尊身上那极其清净、明亮、浑然一体的身光,毫无间断地完全覆盖、压倒了它。巴利
196.Sabbaṃsuvaṇṇavaṇṇameva ahosi ativiya parisuddhāya pabhassarāya ekagghanāya bhagavato sarīrappabhāya nirantaraṃ abhibhūtattā.
“法”是指教理之法。“转起”是指以圣典的方式开示。他之所以一开始就坐在前面,是为了回应教诫。巴利
Dhammeti pariyattidhamme. Pavattāti pāvacanabhāvena desetā. Puratova nisīdi ovādappaṭikaraṇabhāvato.
197 所谓“以布施利益为名的利得”,是指容色施、力量施等各类布施所带来的、被称为布施利益的现世利益和来世利益,这些都是应当希求的利得。而“那些不是利得”,是说那些对你来说全都不是利得,根本算不上是利得。“现法”,是指现世、能当下亲身证到的,也就是就在此生、就在这个自体中产生的利益。“后世”,是因为死后要前往他世,所以把他世叫作“后世”,也就是在他世产生的利益。现世利益和来世利益合在一起,就是现世来世利益。“以布施利益为名的利得”,就是指由布施利益所构成的利得。“同等果”是说这些的果报完全平等,没有差异,而不是只有一部分平等,所以叫同等果。这里“团食”,是指以团食为对象的布施所生的福德。巴利
197.Dānānisaṃsasaṅkhātālābhāti vaṇṇadānabaladānādibhedā dānassa ānisaṃsasaññitā diṭṭhadhammikā, samparāyikā ca lābhā icchitabbā. Te alābhāti te sabbe tuyhaṃ alābhā, lābhā eva na honti. Diṭṭheva dhamme paccakkhabhūte imasmiṃyeva attabhāve bhavā diṭṭhadhammikā. Samparetabbato pecca gantabbato ‘‘samparāyo’’ti laddhanāme paraloke bhavā samparāyikā. Diṭṭhadhammikā ca samparāyikā ca diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikā. Dānānisaṃsasaṅkhātā lābhāti dānānisaṃsabhūtā lābhā. Sabbathā samameva hutvā samaṃ phalaṃ etesaṃ na ekadesenāti samasamaphalā. Piṇḍapātāti tabbisayaṃ dānamayaṃ puññamāha.
如果按“福田”来说,他们的果报是平等的,那么即使同一个人相续中,凡夫和阿拉汉的状态确实有差别,难道他们的福田就有优劣之分吗?为了说明这一点,所以说了“难道不是……”等话。所谓“般涅槃的同等”,是指烦恼般涅槃和蕴般涅槃的同等。通过“受用后般涅槃”这句话说明:依靠受用殊胜团食所滋养的色身,法身安乐地舍离了烦恼;同样,因为食物适悦的成就,也安乐地舍离了诸蕴。这样一来,烦恼的舍离和蕴的舍离都以安乐成就为原因,于是两种团食的果报平等就显示出来了。以“团食”为代表来说明团食布施,也正是这个意思。就像善生女当时生起广大的心愿:“依靠这食物,愿我天神的容色、快乐、力量等功德圆满成就。”同样,铁匠之子准陀也生起广大心愿:“依靠这食物,愿世尊的容色、快乐、力量等功德圆满成就。”因此,从他们两人的心愿也可以知道,二者的果报是平等的。虽然世尊每天都有二十四万亿次定的受用,但就像在成正觉那天,发起新的观修时,以色七法等十四种方式作意,通过大观门进入那些定一样,在般涅槃那天,他也进入了所有这些定。因此,从定的平等来说,他们的果报也是平等的。准陀的忆念暂且说更为殊胜,因为他所布施的对象是世尊,不会有什么变化;但善生女所布施的对象是天神,怎么能一样呢?因为她的认知就是那样,所以说了“善生女也……”等话。“后来”是指从成正觉之后。“再后来”是指从般涅槃之后。“法顶”是指诸法的顶点,也就是涅槃。“被我执取”是指以我为所缘而执取。因此说了“据说对我……”等话。巴利
Yadi khettavasena nesaṃ samaphalatā adhippetā, satipi ekasantānabhāve puthujjanaarahantabhāvasiddhaṃ nanu tesaṃ khettaṃ visiṭṭhanti dassetuṃ ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādimāha. Parinibbānasamatāyāti kilesaparinibbānakhandhaparinibbānabhāvena parinibbānasamatāya. ‘‘Paribhuñjitvā parinibbuto’’ti etena yathā paṇītapiṇḍapātaparibhogūpatthambhitarūpakāyasannissayo dhammakāyo sukheneva kilese pariccaji, bhojanasappāyasaṃsiddhiyā evaṃ sukheneva khandhe pariccajīti evaṃ kilesapariccāgassa, khandhapariccāgassa ca sukhasiddhinimittatāya ubhinnaṃ piṇḍapātānaṃ samaphalatā jotitā. ‘‘Piṇḍapātasīsena ca piṇḍapātadānaṃ jotita’’nti vutto vāyamattho. Yathā hi sujātāya ‘‘imaṃ āhāraṃ nissāya mayhaṃ devatāya vaṇṇasukhabalādiguṇā sammadeva sampajjeyyu’’nti uḷāro ajjhāsayo tadā ahosi, evaṃ cundassapi kammāraputtassa ‘‘imaṃ āhāraṃ nissāya bhagavato vaṇṇasukhabalādiguṇā sammadeva sampajjeyyu’’nti uḷāro ajjhāsayoti evampi nesaṃ ubhinnaṃ samaphalatā veditabbā. Satipi catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattīnaṃ devasikaṃ vaḷañjanasamāpattibhāve yathā pana abhisambujjhanadivase abhinavavipassanaṃ paṭṭhapento rūpasattakādi (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.707 vitthāro) vasena cuddasahākārehi sannetvā mahāvipassanāmukhena tā samāpattiyo samāpajji, evaṃ parinibbānadivasepi sabbā tā samāpajjīti evaṃ samāpattisamatāyapi tesaṃ samaphalatā. Cundassa tāva anussaraṇaṃ uḷārataraṃ hotu bhagavato dinnabhāvena aññathattābhāvato, sujātāya pana kathaṃ devatāya dinnanti? Evaṃsaññibhāvatoti āha ‘‘sujātā cā’’tiādi. Aparabhāgeti abhisambodhito aparabhāge. Puna aparabhāgeti parinibbānato parato. Dhammasīsanti dhammānaṃ matthakabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Me gahitanti mama vasena gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mayhaṃ kirā’’tiādi.
增上的状态就是“增上”的意思,所以他说“能导向最上地位”。巴利
Adhipatibhāvo ādhipateyyanti āha ‘‘jeṭṭhabhāvasaṃvattaniyaka’’nti.
“防护”就是戒的防护。“怨仇”指杀生等五种怨仇。因为它具有怨的性质,又是怨的起因,所以称为“怨仇”。“善巧”指的是智慧,具备智慧的人就是善巧,所以说“善巧者就是具足智慧的人”。“智成就”就是智慧的圆满,这应当从最上道的角度来理解;而最上道能无余地断除烦恼,所以说“以圣道……断除”。“断除了这恶法”的意思是:先通过布施断除悭贪等恶法,通过持戒断除杀生等恶法,这是部分断除;然后通过止观等法门,以镇伏的方式舍离;接着依照道的次第,以彻底断除的方式无余断除一切恶法。正因为这样断除,贪等烦恼灭尽,以烦恼般涅槃而一切烦恼完全止息,寂灭、般涅槃。这是就有余涅槃界而作的教导,因此总结说:“如是库达……观察……而发出自说。”巴利
Saṃvareti sīlasaṃvare. Veranti pāṇātipātādipañcavidhaṃ veraṃ. Tañhi veridhammabhāvato, verahetutāya ca ‘‘vera’’nti vuccati. Kosallaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, tena yutto kusaloti āha ‘‘kusalo pana ñāṇasampanno’’ti. Ñāṇasampadā nāma ñāṇapāripūrī, sā ca aggamaggavasena veditabbā, aggamaggo ca niravasesato kilese pajahatīti āha ‘‘ariyamaggena…pe… jahātī’’ti. Imaṃ pāpakaṃ jahitvāti dānena tāva lobhamacchariyādipāpakaṃ, sīlena pāṇātipātādipāpakaṃ jahitvā tadaṅgavasena pahāya tato samathavipassanādhammehi vikkhambhanavasena, tato maggapaṭipāṭiyā samucchedavasena anavasesaṃ pāpakaṃ pahāya. Tathā pahīnattā eva rāgādīnaṃ khayā kilesanibbānena sabbaso kilesavūpasamena nibbuto parinibbutoti saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto ‘‘iti cundassa…pe… sampassamāno udānaṃ udānesī’’ti.
双沙罗树解说巴利
Yamakasālavaṇṇanā
198 这段的意思是:在拘尸那罗,那座园林位于城的西南方,就像阿努拉德普勒的塔园位于城的西南方一样。因为想进城的人从园林那边过来,再由此前往城里,所以叫“邻近”;那片沙罗林就立在那里,沙罗树排成一行行。“中间”就是指中央。据说,那是为在那里铺设的床座而说的。在那里……有一部分是脚的位置,所以经文说“在两棵双沙罗树中间”。“交错”是说树枝和枝条彼此缠连在一起,看起来像是交错着。注释书里也说“树枝竖立”。至于经文里说“铺设头朝北的床”,那是为了让前来作最后瞻仰的众天神能够看到,才这样说的。不过有些人说:“这句话的意思是脸朝北,头朝东来铺床。”那只是他们自己的看法。巴利
198.Evaṃtaṃ kusinārāyaṃ hotīti yathā anurādhapurassa thūpārāmo dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ, evaṃ taṃ uyyānaṃ kusinārāya dakkhiṇapacchimadisāyaṃ hoti. Tasmāti yasmā nagaraṃ pavisitukāmā uyyānato upecca vattanti gacchanti etenāti ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati, taṃ sālapantibhāvena ṭhitaṃ sālavanaṃ. Antarenāti vemajjhe. Tassa kira mañcakassāti tattha paññapiyamānassa tassa mañcakassa. Tatrāpi…pe… eko pādabhāgassa, tasmā ‘‘antarena yamakasālāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Saṃsibbitvāti aññamaññaāsattaviṭapasākhatāya saṃsibbitvā viya. ‘‘Ṭhitasākhā’’tipi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘uttarasīsakaṃ mañcakaṃ paññapehī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ pacchimadassanaṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgatānaṃ devatānaṃ daṭṭhuṃ yogyatāvasena vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘uttaradisāvilokanamukhaṃ pubbadisāsīsakaṃ katvā mañcakaṃ paññapehīti attho’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ.
这些是象中最殊胜的,意思是:在那些按种姓、行境等而得名的象当中,以力量最为优胜。不过在《中部注》里,有些象的来历和这里说的不一样,但那应该看成只是名称上的差别而已。巴利
Ete nāgānamuttamāti ete gottato gocariādināmakā hatthināgesu balena seṭṭhatamā. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148) pana keci hatthino ito aññathā āgatā, so pana nesaṃ nāmamattakato bhedo daṭṭhabbo.
从受用之时开始……一直到耗尽,关于“并非因为被受用”,应按照前面所说的方式来理解其含义。“滚沸”指的是波浪。因为业已经得到了机会,随着那业生起的疾病就会压过健康,为了说明这个意思,所以说了“如同”。世尊按照前面所说的方式,本来有能力住世一劫或一劫有余,但因为住世那么长时间并没有必要,所以舍弃了寿行,给了那种业机会。因此,为了说明这个意思,说“如同”也是恰当的。巴利
Paribhuttakālato paṭṭhāya…pe… parikkhayaṃ gataṃ, ‘‘na pana paribhuttappaccayā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva attho daṭṭhabbo. Caṅgavāreti ūmiyaṃ. Katokāsassa kammassa vasena yathāsamuṭṭhito rogo ārogyaṃ abhimaddatīti katvā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā heṭṭhā vuttanayena kappaṃ, kappāvasesaṃ vā ṭhātuṃ samattho eva, tattakaṃ kālaṃ ṭhāne payojanābhāvato āyusaṅkhāre ossajjitvā tādisassa kammassa okāsaṃ adāsi, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘viyā’’tipi vattuṃ yujjatiyeva.
他们会认为善是应当做的:“这样的善有大果报、大利益、大神力。”巴利
Kusalaṃ kātabbaṃ maññissanti ‘‘evaṃ mahapphalaṃ, evaṃ mahānisaṃsaṃ, mahānubhāvañca taṃ kusala’’nti.
即使只是让一位众生止息轮回之苦,在诸佛看来也是更加重大的事,因为这种事极其难得。因此才说“又见到其他……”等语。这个含义应当通过《摩犍提经》(《经集》841)来说明。巴利
Ekassāpi sattassa vaṭṭadukkhavūpasamo buddhānaṃ garutaro hutvā upaṭṭhāti atidullabhabhāvato, tasmā ‘‘aparampi passatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, svāyamattho māgaṇḍiyasuttena (su. ni. 841) dīpetabbo.
第三个原因,是为了避免众生可能生起的不利之事。为了说明这一点,他又说“又见到其他……”等等。巴利
Tatiyaṃ pana kāraṇaṃ sattānaṃ uppajjanakaanatthapariharaṇanti taṃ dassento puna ‘‘aparampi passatī’’tiādimāha.
狮子卧:这里的“卧”指躺卧的姿势。像狮子那样躺卧,就是狮子卧,那就是狮子卧。或者,“狮子卧”指最殊胜的卧法。这两种含义后面会讲到。巴利
Sīhaseyyanti. Ettha sayanaṃ seyyā, sīhassa viya seyyā sīhaseyyā, taṃ sīhaseyyaṃ. Atha vā sīhaseyyanti seṭṭhaseyyaṃ, yadidaṃ atthadvayaṃ parato āgamissati.
“以左胁而卧”这种说法,指的是享受欲乐者的卧姿。以右胁而卧的情况其实并不存在,因为右手要用来握持身体等,不适合那样卧;而且这是就男子而言的。巴利
‘‘Vāmena passena sentī’’ti evaṃ vuttā kāmabhogiseyyā,dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthassa sarīraggahaṇādiyogakkhamato, purisavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ.
他们没办法只朝一侧躺着,因为那样会生起痛苦。巴利
Ekenapassena sayituṃ na sakkonti dukkhuppattito.
这就是所说的“狮子卧”。用“具足威光”这句话,是在显示狮子没有恐惧。因为其他胆小的野兽进入自己的窝时,总是先带着恐惧,然后随便怎么躺下;而狮子因为无所畏惧,就像正念现前的比丘一样,先提起正念才躺下。所以说“前脚”等话。把左前脚叠放在右前脚上,也就是把两只前脚放在同一个位置。“后脚”,就是两只后脚。应当知道,这里也同样按照上面说的方式,把脚放在同一个位置;而这样安放,正是无所畏惧的表现。至于“然后抬起头”等所说的狮子动作,应当理解为:就像毫无恐惧地醒来一样,这是由无畏自然成就的。狮子伸展身体,是为了让长时间保持同一姿势的身体各部分,在行走等动作中变得灵活适用。三遍狮子吼,则是为了吓退弱小的兽类。巴利
Ayaṃ sīhaseyyāti ayaṃ evaṃ vuttā sīhaseyyā. ‘‘Tejussadattā’’ti iminā sīhassa abhīrubhāvaṃ dasseti. Bhīrukā hi sesamigā attano āsayaṃ pavisitvā santāsapubbakaṃ yathā tathā sayanti, sīho pana abhīrubhāvato satokārī bhikkhu viya satiṃ upaṭṭhāpetvāva sayati. Tenāha ‘‘purimapāde’’tiādi. Dakkhiṇe purimapāde vāmassa purimapādassa ṭhapanavasena dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā. Pacchimapādeti dve pacchimapāde. Vuttanayeneva idhāpi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne pādaṭṭhapanaṃ veditabbaṃ, ṭhitokāsasallakkhaṇaṃ abhīrubhāveneva. ‘‘Sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā’’tiādinā vuttā sīhakiriyā anutrāsapabujjhanaṃ viya abhīrubhāvasiddhā dhammatāvasenevāti veditabbā. Sīhavijambhitavijambhanaṃ ativelaṃ ekākārena ṭhapitānaṃ sarīrāvayavānaṃ gamanādikiriyāsu yogyabhāvāpādanatthaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ sīhanādanadanaṃ appesakkhamigajātapariharaṇatthaṃ.
“卧”是指以无所牵挂的状态而安住,所以叫卧。第四禅本身就是卧,也就是第四禅卧。那是什么样的第四禅呢?是出入息念的第四禅。因为从那里出定后,世尊修习增长观,次第证得最高的道而成为如来。有人说:“这只是一个近因,并不是真正的卧。不过,因为经文将会说‘从第四禅出定后,世尊随即般涅槃’,所以世间的第四禅定才是如来卧。”如果这样,如来卧就只在般涅槃时才成立,可是世尊并不是经常安住在世间第四禅定中。这里应当理解为以最高果而现起的第四禅。就像有情的睡眠是以有分心而现起,具有入睡的状态,而且那是众生从初生以来就大多数时候如此;同样,世尊从圣者之生以来就大多数时候如此、以最高果为体的第四禅,应当理解为“如来卧”。所谓狮子卧,就是最上的卧,所以说“最上卧”。巴利
Seti abyāvaṭabhāvena pavattati etthāti seyyā, catutthajjhānameva seyyā catutthajjhānaseyyā. Kiṃ pana taṃ catutthajjhānanti? Ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ, tato hi vuṭṭhahitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā bhagavā anukkamena aggamaggaṃ adhigantvā tathāgato jātoti. ‘‘Tayidaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, na seyyā, tathāpi yasmā ‘catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyī’ti (dī. ni. 2.219) vakkhati, tasmā lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpatti eva tathāgataseyyā’’ti keci, evaṃ sati parinibbānakālikāva tathāgataseyyāti āpajjati, na ca bhagavā lokiyacatutthajjhānasamāpajjanabahulo vihāsi. Aggaphalavasena pavattaṃ panettha catutthajjhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha yathā sattānaṃ niddupagamanalakkhaṇā seyyā bhavaṅgacittavasena hoti, sā ca nesaṃ paṭhamajātisamanvayā yebhuyyavuttikā, evaṃ bhagavato ariyajātisamanvayaṃ yebhuyyavuttikaṃ aggaphalabhūtaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ ‘‘tathāgataseyyā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Sīhaseyyā nāma seṭṭhaseyyāti āha ‘‘uttamaseyyā’’ti.
“不起卧”就是:这个卧没有起身,所以叫不起,也就是那不起卧。因为不存在“我要从这里起身”的作意,所以没有说“作意起想”。“此处”是指进入这个不起卧的时候。这是身体的不起,不是心的不起;如果从心来说不起,那就叫入睡。为了说明没有那种心的不起,所以说了“因睡眠”等话。这里的“有分”,就是指具有入睡特相的有分心。巴利
Natthi etissā uṭṭhānanti anuṭṭhānā, seyyā, taṃ anuṭṭhānaseyyaṃ. ‘‘Ito uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti manasikārassa abhāvato ‘‘uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasi karitvā’’ti na vuttaṃ.Etthāti etasmiṃ anuṭṭhānaseyyupagamane. Kāyavasena anuṭṭhānaṃ, na cittavasena, cittavasena ca anuṭṭhānaṃ nāma niddupagamananti tadabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘niddāvasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgassāti niddupagamanalakkhaṇassa bhavaṅgassa.
“处处盛开”:是指在一切地方都全面绽放,不是只开了一部分。因此说“到处都开满了花”。“同一覆盖”:是指被盛开的花以同一种方式完全盖住,处处都盖满了。“低垂的莲花”:是指立在那里、像是往下看的莲花。因为被五种颜色的花覆盖,所以就像孔雀尾羽束一样。巴利
Sabbapāliphullāti sabbatthakameva vikasanavasena phullā, na ekadesavikasanavasena. Tenāha ‘‘sabbe samantato pupphitā’’ti. Ekacchannāti samphullapupphehi ekākārena sabbattheva chāditā. Ullokapadumānīti heṭṭhā olokentāni viya tiṭṭhanapadumāni. Morapiñchakalāpo viya pañcavaṇṇapupphasañchāditattā.
从欢喜池生出的,是指从欢喜池岸边生出的。像大桶那么大的量,是指约有一阿罗迦的量。投进去的,是指被扔进去的。只撒落在身体上,是指像覆盖一样只遍散在身体上。巴利
Nandapokkharaṇīsambhavānīti nandapokkharaṇītīrasambhavāni. Mahātumbamattanti āḷhakamattaṃ. Paviṭṭhānīti khittāni. Sarīrameva okirantīti sarīrameva ajjhokiranti.
为诸天神所准备的栴檀粉末:是指风能把香气吹送到六十由旬乃至五十由旬远的纯白栴檀粉末。天香网粉末:是指天界的香、天界的粉末。雄黄、安善那粉末等,也应知是天界的、具有最上等妙香的。因此说“一切天香、熏香的种种”。巴利
Devatānaṃupakappanacandanacuṇṇānīti saṭṭhipi paññāsampi yojanāni vāyanakasetavaṇṇacandanacuṇṇāni. Dibbagandhajālacuṇṇānīti dibbagandhadibbacuṇṇāni. Haritālaañjanacuṇṇādīnipi dibbāni paramasugandhāni evāti veditabbāni. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbadibbagandhavāsavikatiyo’’ti.
他们聚集在一个轮围世界里,在空中奏乐,就像大出离的时候一样。巴利
Ekacakkavāḷe sannipatitvā antalikkhe vajjanti mahābhinikkhamanakāle viya.
“他们”指天神。“正在编织”就是正在做花鬘。“尚未完成”就是已经按心中所愿做完了。“以手对手”就是用自己的手去握别人的手。“以颈对颈”就是以搂住脖子的方式,用自己的脖子去贴对方的脖子。“握住”就是触碰。“大名闻,大名闻”是重复称呼,是他们彼此打招呼的话。巴利
Tāti devatā. Ganthamānā vāti mālaṃ racantiyo eva. Apariniṭṭhitā vāti yathādhippāyaṃ pariyositā eva. Hatthena hatthanti attano hatthena parassa hatthaṃ. Gīvāya gīvanti kaṇṭhagāhavasena attano gīvāya parassa gīvaṃ. Gahetvāti āmasitvā. Mahāyaso mahāyasoti āmeḍitavasena aññamaññaṃ ālāpavacanaṃ.
199 看到为了向如来表达敬意与供养而发起的大精进。巴利
199.Mahantaṃ ussāhanti tathāgatassa pūjāsakkāravasena pavattiyamānaṃ mahantaṃ ussāhaṃ disvā.
这里说的“道”,就是指前分道。所谓“适宜”,是因为它与应当证得的九种出世间法相称。巴利
Sāyevapana paṭipadāti pubbabhāgapaṭipadā eva. Anucchavikattāti adhigantabbassa navavidhalokuttaradhammassa anurūpattā.
所谓“戒”,说的是行戒。“仪则的规定”就是行戒。从“直到种姓”起,到种姓智为止,这期间应当持续修习的止观就是正行道。现在为了从反面和正面两方面说明这正行道,才说了“因此”等话。“胜者墨线经”,是指木匠胜者所设立、用来显示应避免和应受持之法的墨线经,也就是学处的界限。在近事男、近事女的部分中,说“作香供养、作花供养”,这是就行戒方面来说明其行持;由此应当知道,比丘、比丘尼也同样被允许这样做。巴利
Sīlanti cārittasīlamāha. Ācārapaññattīti cārittasīlaṃ. Yāva gotrabhutoti yāva gotrabhuñāṇaṃ, tāva pavattetabbā samathavipassanā sammāpaṭipadā. Idāni taṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ byatirekato, anvayato ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Jinakāḷasuttanti jinamahāvaḍḍhakinā ṭhapitaṃ vajjetabbagahetabbadhammasandassanakāḷasuttaṃ sikkhāpadamariyādaṃ, upāsakopāsikāvāresu ‘‘gandhapūjaṃ mālāpūjaṃ karotī’’ti vacanaṃ cārittasīlapakkhe ṭhapetvā karaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tena bhikkhubhikkhunīnampi tathākaraṇaṃ anuññātamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里说“此人”,是指法随法行之道。巴利
Ayañhīti dhammānudhammapaṭipadaṃ sandhāya vadati.
优波婆那长老的注释巴利
Upavāṇattheravaṇṇanā
200 “移开”是指他让优波婆那从原来所在的位置退开,而不是斥责他。因此说“阿难”等。“或如所说”就是像《等心说法经》里所说的那样。“遮蔽”就是覆盖的意思。巴利
200.Apanesīti ṭhitappadesato yathā apagacchati, evamakāsi, na pana nibbhacchi. Tenāha ‘‘ānando’’tiādi. Vuttasadisā vāti samacittapariyāyadesanāyaṃ (a. ni. 2.37) vuttasadisā eva. Āvārentoti chādento.
因为迦叶佛的塔庙曾有守护天神,所以只有这位长老具足威光,其他阿拉汉则没有。应当这样联系来理解。巴利
Yasmā kassapassabuddhassa cetiye ārakkhadevatā ahosi, tasmā therova tejussado, na aññe arahantoti ānetvā yojanā.
现在,为了从(佛)降临开始,详细说明这件事,便以“据说在毗婆尸正自觉者(的时代)……”等语开端。“四大王天之神”这一句,应当按牛与牛犊的归纳方式来理解,因为地居天等也被包含在其中。那些人类的……巴利
Idāni āgamanato paṭṭhāya tamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘vipassimhi kira sammāsambuddhe’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Cātumahārājikā devatā’’ti idaṃ gobalībaddañāyena gahetabbaṃ bhummadevatādīnampi tappariyāpannattā. Tesaṃ manussānaṃ.
所谓“那里”,就是指迦叶世尊的塔庙。巴利
Tatthāti kassapassa bhagavato cetiye.
201 能承受的意思就是能接受、能欢喜。巴利
201.Adhivāsentīti rocenti.
像被砍断而倒下那样,就是“如被斩首般倒下”;那是一种中性抽象的说法。“旋转”是指朝着正面转。它们掉在哪里,就从那里只转几肘的距离,然后又以旋转的方式回到原来掉下的地方。所以说“旋转着,又回到掉下的地方”。“翻转”是指从掉下的地方转开。所以说“翻转着,从掉下的地方朝另一边转去”。为了说明向前转是“旋转”,另外三种是“翻转”,才说了“再者”等话。天神撑不住,因为会像水一样沉下去。天神沉陷是因为诸界极其柔细之故。所以说“在那里”等话。“在那里”的意思是在原本的土地上;“在地面上化现出地”的意思是以神通威力,在原本的土地上化现出能够支撑自己身体的地。巴利
Chinnapāto viya chinnapāto, taṃ chinnapātaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso yaṃ. Āvaṭṭantīti abhimukhabhāvena vaṭṭanti. Yattha patitā, tato katipayaratanaṭṭhānaṃ vaṭṭanavaseneva gantvā puna yathāpatitameva ṭhānaṃ vaṭṭanavasena āgacchanti. Tenāha ‘‘āvaṭṭantiyopatitaṭṭhānameva āgacchantī’’ti. Vivaṭṭantīti yattha patitā, tato vinivaṭṭanti. Tenāha ‘‘patitaṭṭhānato parabhāgaṃ vaṭṭamānā gacchantī’’ti. Purato vaṭṭanaṃ āvaṭṭanaṃ, itaraṃ tividhampi vivaṭṭananti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Devatā dhāretuṃ na sakkoti udakaṃ viya osīdanato. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthāti pakatipathaviyaṃ. Devatā osīdanti dhātūnaṃ saṇhasukhumālabhāvato. Pathaviyaṃpathaviṃ māpesunti pakatipathaviyaṃ attano sarīraṃ dhāretuṃ samatthaṃ iddhānubhāvena pathaviṃ māpesuṃ.
就算没有忧,有些人照样还是有贪;可要是没有贪,忧根本不可能生起。正因为它们属于同一类,所以说“离贪者”就是已经断除了忧的人。就像石柱一样,面对合意和不合意的东西都毫不动摇。巴利
Kāmaṃ domanasse asatipi ekacco rāgo hotiyeva, rāge pana asati domanassassa asambhavo evāti tadekaṭṭhabhāvatoti āha ‘‘vītarāgāti pahīnadomanassā’’ti. Silāthambhasadisā iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikāratāya.
四种令人警醒之处解说巴利
Catusaṃvejanīyaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
202 “恒河此岸”:指恒河的此岸部分。“拿着清扫垃圾的扫帚”等,是说明各人在自己住处做日常事务的方式。“如此在两个时候”等,是为了举例而引述,这个意思前面已经讲过了。巴利
202.Apāragaṅgāyāti gaṅgāya orambhāge. ‘‘Saṅkārachaḍḍakasammajjaniyo gahetvā’’tiādi attano attano vasanaṭṭhāne vattakaraṇākāradassanaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ dvīsu kālesū’’tiādi nidassanatthaṃ paccāmasanaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā adhigataṃ.
“bhāvanīya”这个词,如果按业具格来解释,就是“应当被尊重”的意思,所以经文说“以心所修习、所尊重的”。但在第二种解释中,修习和增长是从断除对立面而来的,所以说“或那些……”等等。巴利
Kammasādhano sambhāvanattho bhāvanīya-saddoti āha ‘‘manasā bhāvite sambhāvite’’ti. Dutiyavikappe pana bhāvanaṃ, vaḍḍhanañca paṭipakkhapahānatoti āha ‘‘ye vā’’tiādi.
对佛、法等三种对象生起清净信心,不只是靠单纯相信业与果报。他的这种信成就,应当这样理解:为了用果来显示因,所以说“具足仪轨者”。所谓悚惧,就是伴随着愧的智慧,四圣地之诞生处等也是它生起的原因,所以说“能产生悚惧的(事)”。巴利
Buddhādīsu tīsu vatthūsu pasannacittassa, na kammaphalasaddhāmattena. Sā cassa saddhāsampadā evaṃ veditabbāti phalena hetuṃ dassento ‘‘vattasampannassā’’ti āha. Saṃvego nāma sahottappañāṇaṃ, abhijātiṭṭhānādīnipi tassa uppattihetūni bhavantīti āha ‘‘saṃvegajanakānī’’ti.
为了礼敬塔庙而进行的游行,就是塔庙游行。他们一定会投生到天界,因为以佛陀功德为所缘的善思,本身就有导向天界的作用。巴利
Cetiyapūjanatthaṃ cārikā cetiyacārikā. Sagge patiṭṭhahissantiyeva buddhaguṇārammaṇāya kusalacetanāya saggasaṃvattaniyabhāvato.
阿难问事注释巴利
Ānandapucchākathāvaṇṇanā
203 这里说的“于此”,是指对女人。最高的修行就是不见女人,因为见是一切无益之事的根本。“贪”是指欲贪。“心之摇动”是指心的躁动,会障碍修行。“作嘎吱声后”是指吃带骨头的食物时,发出咀嚼的响声。在无量长的时间里领受苦受,是指领受没有间断的苦受。“混融”是指不混杂、没有摩擦。“侵入”是指心不进入那里。就像手持利剑的怨敌,也像想吃人的饿鬼。“靠近”是指用践踏等方式来加害。“于彼”是指对女人。出家者应作之事,是指出家人应当做的事,比如接受食物等。“念”是指应当让身至念现前。巴利
203.Etthāti mātugāme. Ayaṃ uttamā paṭipatti,yadidaṃ adassanaṃ, dassanamūlakattā tappaccayānaṃ sabbānatthānaṃ. Lobhoti kāmarāgo. Cittacalanā paṭipattiantarāyakaro cittakkhobho. Murumurāpetvāti saaṭṭhikaṃ katvā khādane anuravadassanaṃ. Aparimitaṃ kālaṃ dukkhānubhavanaṃ aparicchinnadukkhānubhavanaṃ. Vissāsoti visaṅgo ghaṭṭanābhāvo. Otāroti tattha cittassa anuppaveso. Asihatthena verīpurisena, pisācenāpi khāditukāmena. Āsīdeti akkamanādivasena bādheyya. Assāti mātugāmassa. Pabbajitehi kattabbakammanti āmisapaṭiggahaṇādi pabbajitehi kātabbaṃ kammaṃ. Satīti vā kāyagatāsati upaṭṭhāpetabbā.
204 不被系缚,是指不背负负担。心已发出,是指心朝向涅槃而去。巴利
204.Atantibaddhāti abhāravahā. Pesitacittāti nibbānaṃ pati pesitacittā.
205 “已打散”是指用弹棉花的弓,以解开缠结的方式把发髻打散。因此说“善加揉打”,意思是不混杂地充分揉打。通过描述既好看又令人警醒的地方,也就说明了居住的处所。巴利
205.Vihatenāti kappāsavihananadhanunā pabbajaṭānaṃ vijaṭanavasena hatena. Tenāha ‘‘supothitenā’’ti, asaṅkaraṇavasena suṭṭhu pothitenāti attho, dassanīyasaṃvejanīyaṭṭhānakittanena ca vasanaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ.
关于阿难陀稀有法的解说巴利
Ānandaacchariyadhammavaṇṇanā
207 没有见到长老,就呼唤他说——这里“没有见到”是指:他观察时,知道了长老所站的地方和他的行踪,于是才呼唤。巴利
207.Theraṃ adisvā āmantesīti tattha adisvā āvajjanto therassa ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ, pavattiñca ñatvā āmantesi.
身业的“有益”是因为它由有益的意乐所推动,所以注疏说“以增长利益而作”。“快乐”是指身体上没有苦,“心的快乐”则是因为从心的乐受生起,所以说“唯以乐与喜悦而作”。为了显示“没有间隔、没有分别,即不二”这个意思,所以说了“如同……”等话。由于世尊作为福田的圆满,以及长老意乐的圆满,这项业无法用“只有这么多”来衡量,因为它没有限量,所以注疏说“纵然轮围世界……”等话。巴利
Kāyakammassa hitabhāvo hitajjhāsayena pavattitattāti āha ‘‘hitavuddhiyā katenā’’ti. Sukhabhāvo kāyikadukkhābhāvo, cetasikasukhabhāvo cetasikasukhasamuṭṭhitattā cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sukhasomanasseneva katenā’’ti. Āvirahovibhāgato advayabhāvato advayenāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Satthu khettabhāvasampattiyā, therassa ajjhāsayasampattiyā ca ‘‘ettakamida’’nti pamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pamāṇavirahitattā tassa kammassāti āha ‘‘cakkavāḷampī’’tiādi.
像这样转起的,是指以这样限定对象的慈心修习而转起的。以它而作、而积集的福,就是“作福者”;意思是,为了证得阿罗汉果而已经做了该做的。因此说“显示他具足决意”。巴利
Evaṃ pavattitenāti evaṃ odissakamettābhāvanāya vasena pavattitena. Vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtaṃ kataṃ upacitaṃ puññaṃ etenāti katapuñño, arahattādhigamāya katādhikāroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘abhinīhārasampannosīti dassetī’’ti.
208 就像把某处收缩着停住的大地铺展开来,就像把收拢着停住的虚空扩展开来,就像把高十六万四千由旬的轮围山向下压下去,就像把高十六万八千由旬的须弥山举起来,就像抓住长宽各一百由旬的大阎浮树的树干把它摇动——这五个譬喻,都是为了显示这位长老功德的广大,以及显示其他人难以做到,才被引来说明的。这里,“善巧者(byatta)”是指具足所谓于(五)蕴等善巧的明达;“具慧者(medhāvī)”是指具足所谓“慧(medhā)”的、善加修习的智慧。通过“正由此”中的“及”字,应当知道这里也含摄了“我如今是阿拉汉、正自觉者”“在包括天人的世间中,没有能与我匹敌的人巴利
208. Katthaci saṅkucitaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ mahāpathaviṃ pattharanto viya, paṭisaṃhaṭaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ ākāsaṃ vitthārento viya, catusaṭṭhādhikayojanasatasahassubbedhaṃ cakkavāḷagiriṃ adho osārento viya, aṭṭhasaṭṭhādhikasahassayojanasatasahassubbedhaṃ sineruṃ ukkhipento viya, satayojanāyāmavitthāraṃ mahājambuṃ khandhe gahetvā cālento viyāti pañca hi upamā hi therassa guṇakathā mahantabhāvadassanatthañceva aññesaṃ dukkaṭabhāvadassanatthañca āgatāva. Eteneva cāti ca-saddena ‘‘ahaṃ etarahi arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ (dī. ni. 2.4), ‘‘sadevakasmiṃ lokasmiṃ natthi me paṭipuggalo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405; mi. pa. 5.11) ca evaṃ ādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Byattoti khandhakosallādisaṅkhātena veyyattiyena samannāgato. Medhāvīti medhāsaṅkhātāya sammābhāvitāya paññāya samannāgato.
209 所谓“款待法”,是就平常的待人接物方式来说的。不过,对来到的比丘和比丘尼,则通过问答的方式,并随顺他们的心意,应时为他们说法;对近事男和近事女,则以坐下交谈的方式来说法。巴利
209.Paṭisanthāradhammanti pakaticārittavasena vuttaṃ, upagatānaṃ pana bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca pucchāvissajjanavasena ceva cittarucivasena ca yathākālaṃ dhammaṃ desetiyeva, upāsakopāsikānaṃ pana upanisinnakathāvasena.
《大善见王经》讲说注释巴利
Mahāsudassanasuttadesanāvaṇṇanā
210 “小”这个词表示相似、类似,“ka”这个词没有实际意义,所以说“小城”,就是指像城一样狭窄拥挤的地方。因为那个地方形状像尘土飞扬的荒野,所以叫“荒野小城”,因此又说“不平整的小城”。和其他的大城相比,它只有那些大城一部分那么大,所以像分支一样。在这里,“小城”这个词说明了那座城规模很小,“荒野小城”说明了因为土地条件差而低劣,“分支小城”说明了它处于附属地位。“达到精华”:以财富等精华达到实质上的伟大。巴利
210.Khuddaka-saddo patirūpavācī, ka-saddo appatthoti āha ‘‘khuddakanagaraketi nagarapatirūpake sambādhe khuddakanagarake’’ti. Dhuparavisālasaṇṭhānatāya taṃ ‘‘ujjaṅgalanagaraka’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘visamanagarake’’ti. Aññesaṃ mahānagarānaṃ ekadesappamāṇatāya sākhāsadise. Ettha ca ‘‘khuddakanagarake’’ti iminā tassa nagarassa appakabhāvo vutto, ‘‘ujjaṅgalanagarake’’ti iminā bhūmivipattiyā nihīnabhāvo, ‘‘sākhānagarake’’ti iminā appadhānabhāvo. Sārappattāti vibhavasārādinā sāramahattaṃ pattā.
这里说,“咖哈巴那车”是指双瓮之车,而一瓮等于十安巴那。“两辆进入”,是说两辆咖哈巴那车按两种收入的方式进入。巴利
Kahāpaṇasakaṭanti ettha ‘‘dvikumbhaṃ sakaṭaṃ. Kumbho pana dasambaṇo’’ti vadanti. Dve pavisantīti dve kahāpaṇasakaṭāni dve āyavasena pavisanti.
食物丰足,意思是食物容易得到,而且食物精美。因此说“具足嚼食与啖食”。发出声音,意思是怀着喜悦、以传远的声音发出鹤鸣般的叫声。不空旷,意思是不空荡——有时一辆车走在前面,另一辆车跟在后面;有时被指为第二辆的车走在前面,另一辆跟在它后面,就这样互相跟随。此处,指拘舍婆提城。因为那座城广大,又具有神通等功德,鼓等乐器一直不停地被演奏着。samma 声,是彼此亲切问候的声音。tāḷa 声,是铜钹等一切打击乐器的声音。kumbhathūṇa 声,是釜鼓的声音。巴利
Subhikkhāti sulabhāhārā, sundarāhārā ca. Tenāha ‘‘khajjabhojjasampannā’’ti. Saddaṃ karonteti ravasārinā tuṭṭhabhāvena koñcanādaṃ karonte. Avivittāti asuññā, kadāci ratho paṭhamaṃ gacchati, taṃ añño anubandhanto gacchati, kadāci dutiyaṃ vuttaratho paṭhamaṃ gacchati, itaro taṃ anubandhati evaṃ aññamaññaṃ anubandhamānā. Etthāti kusāvatīnagare. Tassa mahantabhāvato ceva iddhādibhāvato ca niccaṃ payojitāneva bheriādīni tūriyāni, samma sammāti vā aññamaññaṃ piyālāpasaddo samma-saddo. Kaṃsatāḷādisabbatāḷāvacarasaddo tāḷa-saddo, kūṭabheri-saddo kumbhathūṇasaddo.
这类声音要按顺序对应理解:有的来自垃圾遍地的街道,有的来自在林中采集球茎、根、叶等,有的来自在那里生活艰苦。但这里并不是这样,因为这里像天界一样,一切都圆满具足。巴利
Evarūpāsaddā honti kacavarākiṇṇavīthitāya, araññe kandamūlapaṇṇādiggahaṇāya, tattha dukkhajīvikatāya cāti yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Idha na evaṃ ahosi devaloke viya sabbaso paripuṇṇasampattikatāya.
“极大的喧哗声”:因为具足信心的天众和优婆塞们,在前方发出了盛大的欢呼声。在那里,由于还没有为世尊建成的精舍,而比丘僧团又人数众多,他们来到之后……便派人前去。派去的时候,他传话说:“世尊为什么在最后的时候不把自己的行踪告诉我们,好让我们不生忧恼呢?”于是以“婆悉咤,今天……”等语传去了教令。巴利
Mahantaṃ kolāhalanti saddhāsampannānaṃ devatānaṃ, upāsakānañca vasena purato purato mahatī ugghosanā hoti. Tattha bhagavantaṃ uddissa katassa vihārassa abhāvato, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca mahantabhāvato te āgantvā…pe… pesesi. Pesento ca ‘‘kathañhi nāma bhagavā pacchime kāle attano pavattiṃ amhākaṃ nārocesi, nesaṃ domanassaṃ mā ahosī’’ti ‘‘ajja kho vāseṭṭhā’’tiādinā sāsanaṃ pesesi.
末罗族礼敬注释巴利
Mallānaṃ vandanāvaṇṇanā
211 211. 他们经历并显现出苦,所以叫“有苦者”;因为苦已经明显现前,所以说“已生起的苦”。由于亲属和血缘的关系,家族在这里延续,所以叫“家族延续”。那些以各自家族身份而住的有情群体,被称为“依家族延续而住”,因此说“家族延续”。而那些末罗国王,是按各自的家族延续来划分的,他们住在城中的街道等地,所以说“以街道区域和巷陌区域”。巴利
211. Aghaṃ dukkhaṃ āventi pakāsentīti aghāvino, pākaṭībhūtadukkhāti āha ‘‘uppannadukkhā’’ti. Ñātisālohitabhāvena kulaṃ parivattati etthāti kulaparivattaṃ. Taṃ taṃkulīnabhāgena ṭhito sattanikāyo ‘‘kulaparivattaso’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘kulaparivatta’’nti. Te pana taṃtaṃkulaparivattaparicchinnā mallarājāno tasmiṃ nagare vīthiādisabhāgena vasantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vīthisabhāgena ceva racchāsabhāgena cā’’ti.
须跋陀罗游方者的故事注释巴利
Subhaddaparibbājakavatthuvaṇṇanā
212 疑本身就是疑法。Ekato 是指不区分土地,笼统地共同来说。Bījagga 是指从种子中取最初的部分,准备好食物后所作的布施。Gabbhakāle 是指从怀胎之后、开始取乳之时。因此说“破胎取乳后”等等。Puthukakāle 是指谷物尚未完全成熟、适合作为嫩苗的果实之时。Lāyanagga 是指在成熟谷物收割时,最初开始收割所作的布施。把收割后的谷物编结成束放置,叫作 veṇikaraṇa;在开始做这件事时的布施,就是 veṇagga。把各束合在一起堆成堆,叫作 kalāpa;在那里最初所作的布施,就是 kalāpagga。从堆中取出、在打谷时最初所作的布施,就是 khalagga。打谷并扬去谷壳后、堆积谷物时最初所作的布施,就是 khalabhaṇḍagga。把谷物从打谷场装入仓库时最初所作的布施,就是 koṭṭhagga。Uddharitvā 是指从仓库取出之后。巴利
212. Kaṅkhā eva kaṅkhādhammo. Ekato vāti bhūmiṃ avibhajitvā sādhāraṇatova. Bījato ca aggaṃ gahetvā āhāraṃ sampādetvā dānaṃ bījaggaṃ. Gabbhakāleti gabbhadhāraṇato paraṃ khīraggahaṇakāle. Tenāha ‘‘gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ niharitvā’’tiādi. Puthukakāleti sassānaṃ nātipakke puthukayogyaphalakāle. Lāyanagganti pakkassa sassassa lavane lavanārambhe dānaṃ adāsi. Lunassa sassassa veṇivasena bandhitvā ṭhapanaṃ veṇikaraṇaṃ. Tassa ārambhe dānaṃ veṇaggaṃ. Veṇiyo pana ekato katvā rāsikaraṇaṃ kalāpo. Tattha aggadānaṃ kalāpaggaṃ. Kalāpato nīharitvā maddane aggadānaṃ khalaggaṃ. Madditaṃ ophuṇitvā dhaññassa rāsikaraṇe aggadānaṃ khalabhaṇḍaggaṃ. Dhaññassa khalato koṭṭhe pakkhipane aggadānaṃ koṭṭhaggaṃ. Uddharitvāti koṭṭhato uddharitvā.
他作了九种最上的布施,以“我怎样才能在导师面前最先获得解脱?”这样的最上布施,说明了他为出离轮回所积累的善法功德,以及他的智慧已经那样成熟,堪能成为最上法开示的容器。因此说“我将为他开示这最上之法”等。他退让一旁,收敛了傲慢。巴利
‘‘Navaaggadānāni adāsī’’ti iminā ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho ahaṃ satthu santike aggatova mucceyya’’nti aggaggadānavasena vivaṭṭūpanissayassa kusalassa katūpacitattā, ñāṇassa ca tathā paripākaṃ gatattā aggadhammadesanāya tassa bhājanabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘imaṃ aggadhammaṃ tassa desessāmī’’tiādi. Ohīyitvā saṅkocaṃ āpajjitvā.
213 虽然想了解,却不执取成见。“他们洞察了吗”,是对心生疑惑者的提问用语,因此解释为“他们知道”。所以经中说:“所有人都没有洞察。”这里的“他们”,指富兰那等人。“那个主张”,就是“大王,造作者……令他人造作者……”等所说的主张,或者就是那一切知智的主张。“能引导出离”,指具有神通示现,或者指他们所成立的教义,因为能从轮回中出离,所以叫能引导出离。应当看到,由这些教法的成就,可推知他们的一切知性;反之,由这些教法的缺失,则可知他们并非一切知。因此说“所以……”等。“因无义利”,指须跋陀罗没有可证得的义利。“因无机会”,指没有机会那样详细地开示法。现在,为了显示那没有机会的情况,而说“初夜分时……”等。巴利
213.Aññātukāmova na sandiṭṭhiṃ parāmāsī. Abbhaññiṃsūti sandehajātassa pucchāvacananti katvā jāniṃsūti atthamāha. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sabbeva na abbhaññiṃsū’’ti. Nesanti pūraṇādīnaṃ. Sā paṭiññāti ‘‘karoto kho mahārāja kārayato’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.166) paṭiññātā, sabbaññupaṭiññā eva vā. Niyyānikāti sappāṭihāriyā, tesaṃ vā siddhantasaṅkhātā paṭiññā vaṭṭato nissaraṇaṭṭhena niyyānikāti. Sāsanassa sampattiyā tesaṃ sabbaññutaṃ, tabbipariyāyato ca asabbaññutaṃ gacchatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Atthābhāvatoti subhaddassa sādhetabbaatthābhāvato. Okāsābhāvatoti tathā vitthāritaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desetuṃ avasarābhāvato. Idāni tameva okāsābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamayāmasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
214 214. 对于“成就沙门身份”的诸法,通过修成这些法就成为沙门;然而,从最殊胜的界定来说,这些法就是圣道法。因此,依据四种道的成就,经中宣说了四种沙门。为了说明这些沙门在外道中完全不存在,所以说“第一种是入流沙门”等。“先前的开示”,是指以“须跋陀罗,无论在哪一个法、律中……”等所说的开示。通过遮遣和表诠两种方式,所要表达的意义得以显明,因此应当知道,这里第一种方式也被“先前的开示”这个词所涵盖。在确定自己的教法时,说“就在这……中”,这是句义关联。“已着手修观者”,是指以修定为业处的观行者,这是针对已达观顶峰的观行者说的,不是指尚未建立观的人。但另一些人说:“在外道中,连开始修观的著述都不存在”,这是一种不加区分的说法。“已证得之处”,是指已证得的原因,意思是为此目的的预备行道;依此证得了入流道,而非更高的道。他安立在入流道上,由于此道的不动法性,或者由于在那里的成就而曾安住,依“过去曾有”之义,安立在入流道者就是入流者,而不是其余圣者,因为他们生于不同的境地。入流者把自己证得之处——入流道——讲给别人后,能使他人也成为安立在入流道者,但不能使他人成为第八者,因为那不可能。这个道理也适用于其余诸道的安立者。这里也应以同样的方式理解其义。“熟练的业处”,是指自己熟练的观业处;由此应当知道,“不加区分的说法”这一主张已被否定。巴利
214. Yesaṃ samaṇabhāvakarānaṃ dhammānaṃ sampādanena samaṇo, te pana ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ariyamaggadhammāti catumaggasaṃsiddhiyā pāḷiyaṃ cattāro samaṇā vuttāti te bāhirasamaye sabbena sabbaṃ natthīti dassento ‘‘paṭhamo sotāpannasamaṇo’’tiādimāha. Purimadesanāyāti ‘‘yasmiñca kho, subhadda, dhammavinaye’’tiādinā vuttāya desanāya. Byatirekato, anvayato ca adhippeto attho vibhāvīyatīti paṭhamanayopettha ‘‘purimadesanāyā’’ti padena saṅgahito vāti daṭṭhabbo. Attano sāsanaṃ niyamento āha ‘‘imasmiṃ kho’’ti yojanā. Āraddhavipassakehīti samādhikammikavipassakehi, sikhāppattavipassake sandhāya vuttaṃ, na paṭṭhapitavipassane. Apare pana ‘‘bāhirakasamaye vipassanārambhassa ganthopi natthevāti avisesavacanameta’’nti vadanti. Adhigataṭṭhānanti adhigatassa kāraṇaṃ, tadatthaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadanti attho, yena sotāpattimaggo adhigato, na uparimaggo, so sotāpattimagge ṭhito akuppadhammatāya tassa, tattha vā siddhito ṭhitapubbo bhūtapubbagatiyāti sotāpattimaggaṭṭho sotāpanno, na sesaariyā bhūmantaruppattito. Sotāpanno hi attanā adhigataṭṭhānaṃ sotāpattimaggaṃ aññassa kathetvā sotāpattimaggaṭṭhaṃ kareyya, na aṭṭhamako asambhavato. Esa nayo sesamaggaṭṭhesūti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Paguṇaṃ kammaṭṭhānanti attano paguṇaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ, eteneva ‘‘avisesavacana’’nti vādo paṭikkhittoti daṭṭhabbo.
这里指的是“一切知智”。因为那种智能在觉悟一切所知法时无著无碍地运作,所以被称为“善巧、熟练、微妙”。多出一年。依此能如实通达四谛法,所以叫“理趣”,也就是出世间道,因此说“圣道法”。依此能亲眼见到圣道,所以叫“分处”,指的是观。因此说“在分处,即观道中”。“沙门亦”这里的“亦”字也要连到“分处随转”上,再合起来理解。因此说“分处随转……无有,是这样说的”。巴利
Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃadhippetaṃ. Tañhi sabbañeyyadhammāvabodhane ‘‘kusalaṃ chekaṃ nipuṇa’’nti vuccati tattha asaṅgaappaṭihataṃ pavattatīti katvā. Samadhikāni ekena vassena. Ñāyanti etena catusaccadhammaṃ yāthāvato paṭivijjhantīti ñāyo, lokuttaramaggoti āha ‘‘ariyamaggadhammassā’’ti. Padissati etena ariyamaggo paccakkhato dissatīti padeso, vipassanāti vuttaṃ ‘‘padese vipassanāmagge’’ti. Samaṇopīti ettha pi-saddo ‘‘padesavattī’’ti etthāpi ānetvā sambandhitabboti āha ‘‘padesavatti…pe… natthīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
215 这里说的“那位”是指前面提到的内弟子。“被那位”是指那位导师。因为他被委派去负责度人出家等事务,所以被安置在自己的位置上。巴利
215.Soti tathāvutto antevāsī. Tenāti ācariyena. Attano ṭhāne ṭhapito hoti parapabbājanādīsu niyuttattā.
“亲证声闻”就是现前亲证的弟子,意思是当面亲闻的弟子。“在世尊住世时”指在世尊还住世的时候,也就是在世尊面前。其余两类也是同样的道理。“所有他”指这三类全部弟子。但这位已经证得阿罗汉果,所以达到了圆满的顶点,成为最后一位亲证声闻。巴利
Sakkhisāvakoti paccakkhasāvako, sammukhasāvakoti attho. Bhagavati dharamāneti dharamānassa bhagavato santike. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Sabbopi soti sabbo so tividhopi. Ayaṃ pana arahattaṃ patto, tasmā paripuṇṇagatāya matthakappatto pacchimo sakkhisāvakoti.
如来最后遗教注释巴利
Tathāgatapacchimavācāvaṇṇanā
216 所谓“彼”,是为了显示对比丘僧团的教诫之相……略……这是结集法藏的长老们所说的,就是这里的意旨。对收在经藏和论藏中的法,完整地宣说、令其明了,就是开示;再依其类别让人知道,把它安置在应受教化者的心相续中,就是施设。所以说“法也是已开示、已施设的”。同样地,对收在律藏中的义理,因为它能调伏身和语,所以得到“律”这个名称;对这个义理完整地宣说、令其明了,就是开示;再依其类别让人知道,不混杂地把它安立起来,就是施设。所以说“律也是已开示、已施设的”。因为律是增上戒学的说明,是教法的根本,所以应当先学律。为了如实显示这个纲要,先说了“我确实为你们……”等话。其中,“依七种罪聚”是指依不违犯七种罪聚来说。这样就能完成导师的职责:通过分辨“这是你们该做的,这是你们不该做的”来教导。巴利
216.Tanti bhikkhusaṅghassa ovādakaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ…pe… vuttaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakehīti adhippāyo. Suttābhidhammasaṅgahitassa dhammassa atisajjanaṃ sambodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ veneyyasantāne ṭhapanaṃ paññāpananti ‘‘dhammopi desito cevapaññatto cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā vinayatantisaṅgahitassa kāyavācānaṃ vinayanato ‘‘vinayo’’ti laddhādhivacanassa atthassa atisajjanaṃ sambodhanaṃ desanā, tasseva pakārato ñāpanaṃ asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ paññāpananti ‘‘vinayopi desito ceva paññatto cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Adhisīlasikkhāniddesabhāvena sāsanassa mūlabhūtattā vinayo paṭhamaṃ sikkhitabboti taṃ tāva ayamuddesaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘mayā hi vo’’tiādimāha. Tattha sattāpattikkhandhavasenāti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamanīyatāvasena . Satthukiccaṃ sādhessati ‘‘idaṃ vo kattabbaṃ, idaṃ vo na kattabba’’nti kattabbākattabbassa vibhāgena anusāsanato.
“以种种方式”是指随顺各类应受化度者的意乐,用各种各样的方式。“这些法”是指这三十七菩提分法。因为以这些法为重点,所以说经的宣说是“已开示经藏”。通过随顺各种修行来教导正确的实践,从而成就导师的事业。按善、不善、无记来分,有九种因。“七触”等说法,是结合七识界来讲的。在法随顺中有三法发趣等六种,同样在法逆、法随顺逆、法逆随顺中也是这样,合起来共有二十四种全发趣,具备这些的就叫“二十四全发趣”。不过,如果按缘随顺等方式来详细分别,实际上有无量的理趣,所以说“以无边际理趣的大发趣为庄严”。“将成就导师的事业”是说,通过蕴、处、界等的分别而了知,能引向四谛的现证,因此将完成导师、正自觉者所应做的事。巴利
Tenatenākārenāti tena tena veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpena pakārena. Ime dhammeti ime sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhamme. Tappadhānattā suttantadesanāya ‘‘suttantapiṭakaṃ desita’’nti vuttaṃ. Satthukiccaṃ sādhessati taṃtaṃcariyānurūpaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā anusāsanato. Kusalākusalābyākatavasena nava hetū. ‘‘Satta phassā’’tiādi sattaviññāṇadhātusampayogavasena vuttaṃ. Dhammānulome tikapaṭṭhānādayo cha, tathā dhammapaccanīye, dhammānulomapaccanīye, dhammapaccanīyānulometi catuvīsati samantapaṭṭhānāni etassāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ pana paccayānulomādivasena vibhajiyamānaṃ aparimāṇanayaṃ evāti āha ‘‘anantanayamahāpaṭṭhānapaṭimaṇḍita’’nti. Satthukiccaṃ sādhessatīti khandhādivibhāgena ñāyamānaṃ catusaccasambodhāvahattā satthārā sammāsambuddhena kātabbakiccaṃ nipphādessati.
他们将教诫、将教导,因为这是从完成教诫与教导职责的角度来说的。巴利
Ovadissanti anusāsissanti ovādānusāsanīkiccanipphādanato.
行(cāritta)是指日常的举止行为,意思是对新学比丘说亲切的话,对长老说恭敬的话。因此说“尊者”或“具寿”。因为“尊者”或“具寿”这些话就是恭敬的说法,而在世间,“尊驾”、“天爱”也是恭敬的说法。巴利
Cārittanti samudācārā, navesu piyālāpaṃ vuḍḍhesu gāravālāpanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘bhanteti vā āyasmāti vā’’ti. Gāravavacanaṃ hetaṃ yadidaṃ bhanteti vā āyasmāti vā, loke pana ‘‘tatra bhava’’nti, ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti ca gāravavacanameva.
当说到“若愿意,可以废除”时,也就等于说了“若不愿意,就不应废除”,所以他说“以选择性措辞而保留”。“力”指智慧之力。如果“不废除”是他们所见且所愿的,那世尊为什么还说“若愿意,可以废除”呢?这是随顺那种人的内心意乐。因为有些人不愿受持微小学处,如果不这样对他们说,他们会对世尊生起不满,那将导致他们长夜不利与痛苦。但这样说了之后,他们就不会不满,反而会想:“这是我们自己的过失,因为在我们当中有人不希望废除。”另有人说:“这是为了让整个教法由僧伽来掌管,才这样说的。”无论世尊制定了什么学处,释迦子沙门们都以头顶戴而受持,如护己命般守护。因此,即使告知“若僧团愿意,可以废除那些微小学处”,他们也不废除,反而一如既往,即使在他灭度之后也依然守护。这也可以看作是为了彰显世尊教法与僧伽的殊胜而这样说。因此,阿难尊者和其他比丘都没有问:“尊者,哪些是微小?哪些是更微小?”因为他们根本没有废除的想法。巴利
‘‘Ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatū’’ti vutte ‘‘na ākaṅkhamāno na samūhanatū’’tipi vuttameva hotīti āha ‘‘vikappavacaneneva ṭhapesī’’ti. Balanti ñāṇabalaṃ. Yadi asamūhananaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, tadeva ca icchitaṃ, atha kasmā bhagavā ‘‘ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatū’’ti avocāti? Tathārūpapuggalajjhāsayavasena. Santi hi keci khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samādāya saṃvattituṃ anicchantā, tesaṃ tathā avuccamāne bhagavati vighāto uppajjeyya, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya, tathā pana vutte tesaṃ vighāto na uppajjeyya ‘‘amhākaṃ evāyaṃ doso, yato amhesu eva keci samūhananaṃ na icchantī’’ti. Keci ‘‘sakalassa pana sāsanassa saṅghāyattabhāvakaraṇatthaṃ tathā vutta’’nti vadanti. Yañca kiñci satthārā sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ samaṇā sakyaputtiyā sirasā sampaṭicchitvā jīvitaṃ viya rakkhanti. Tathā hi te ‘‘khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho samūhanatū’’ti vuttepi na samūhaniṃsu, aññadatthu ‘‘purato viya tassa accayepi rakkhiṃsu evā’’ti satthusāsanassa , saṅghassa ca mahantabhāvadassanatthampi tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi āyasmā ānando, aññepi vā bhikkhū ‘‘katamaṃ pana bhante khuddakaṃ, katamaṃ anukhuddaka’’nti na pucchiṃsu samūhanajjhāsayasseva abhāvato.
不能按那样去理解,意思是:像“那先长老知道哪些是微小学处”这类说法,因为不了解他们真正的意图,所以不能按那种方式去理解他们的话。现在为了说明那个意图,才说“那先长老……”。因为那先长老(详细内容见《弥兰陀问经·不分裂品》)为了截断别人的论议之路,在结集时,从结集法藏的大长老们所选取的段落中,只取了最后一段,用来开示弥兰陀王。而大迦叶长老则是因为不想废除哪怕一条学处,才那样诵出羯磨文。所以,不能按那种方式去理解他们的话。巴利
Na taṃ evaṃ gahetabbanti ‘‘nāgasenatthero khuddānukhuddakaṃ jānātī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ taṃ nesaṃ vacanaṃ iminā vuttākārena na gahetabbaṃ adhippāyassa aviditattā. Idāni taṃ adhippāyaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘nāgasenattherohī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā nāgasenatthero (milindapañhe abhejjavagge vitthāro) paresaṃ vādapathopacchedanatthaṃ saṅgītikāle dhammasaṅgāhakamahātherehi gahitakoṭṭhāsesu ca antimakoṭṭhāsameva gahetvā milindarājānaṃ paññāpesi. Mahākassapatthero pana ekasikkhāpadampi asamūhanitukāmatāya tathā kammavācaṃ sāveti, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ vacanaṃ tathā na gahetabbaṃ.
217 “两种执取”是指两种方式的执取,意思是不确定的执取。“疑惑”是指怀疑生起的过失。因此说“无法决断”。所谓“我告诉你们那”,是就那位有疑惑的比丘,对你们说。巴利
217.Dveḷhakanti dvidhāgāho, anekaṃsaggāhoti attho. Vimatīti saṃsayāpatti. Tenāha ‘‘vinicchituṃ asamatthatā’’ti. Taṃ vo vadāmīti taṃ saṃsayavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya vo tumhe vadāmi.
对于佛陀等人来说,那些比丘的无疑状态并不是他们自己直接造作出来的,所以这是以证悟了那个意义而安住的一切知智本身,也就是“现前作证无疑之智”。就在这里,就这个意义来说。巴利
Nikkaṅkhabhāvapaccakkhakaraṇañāṇaṃ yevāti buddhādīsu tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ nikkaṅkhabhāvassa paccakkhakāriyābhāvato tamatthaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇameva. Ettha etasmiṃ atthe.
218 218. “不放逸”就是不疏忽,它的实际含义是与智慧相应的念。因为在这里,念的作用格外突出,所以才说“以念不分离”。世尊把这一点直接归入“不放逸”这个词本身来教导,这是从含义上说的,也是因为它统摄了全部佛语。巴利
218. Appamajjanaṃ appamādo, so pana atthato ñāṇūpasañhitā sati. Yasmā tattha satiyā byāpāro sātisayo, tasmā ‘‘satiavippavāsenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Appamādapadeyeva pakkhipitvā adāsi taṃ atthato, tassa sakalassa buddhavacanassa saṅgaṇhanato ca.
般涅槃论释巴利
Parinibbutakathāvaṇṇanā
219 在禅那等(修行)以及心的方面,由于达到了最高自在的状态,所以作时间限定:“在这么多时间里,进入这么多等至之后,我将般涅槃”,像这样限定时间之后进入等至,这被称为“般涅槃的准备”。长老,就是阿那律长老。巴利
219. Jhānādīsu, citte ca paramukkaṃsagatavasībhāvatāya ‘‘ettake kāle ettakā samāpattiyo samāpajjitvā parinibbāyissāmī’’ti kālaparicchedaṃ katvā samāpatti samāpajjanaṃ ‘‘parinibbānaparikamma’’nti adhippetaṃ. Theroti anuruddhatthero.
这里说的“也只是略说”,是指前面讲到的六十五种禅那的入定情况同样只是简略的说法。为什么呢?因为世尊在那时也是每天都完整无缺地进入一切日常行持的等至,为了说明这一点,才说了“进入涅槃城”等话。巴利
Ayampicāti yathāvuttapañcasaṭṭhiyā jhānānaṃ samāpannabhāvakathāpi saṅkhepakathā eva, kasmā ? Yasmā bhagavā tadāpi devasikaṃ vaḷañjanasamāpattiyo sabbāpi aparihāpetvā samāpajji evāti dassento ‘‘nibbānapuraṃ pavisanto’’tiādimāha.
这两者同样都是无间的,对于省察来说也是如此,因为它们大多数具有无间性,属于禅那的范畴。由于有分心是最后的心,从那个有而命终,所以称为“死”。因此,不只是世尊一个人如此,而是一切众生都是依有分心而命终的。为了说明这一点,才说了“凡是……”等话。巴利
Imāni dvepi samanantarāneva paccavekkhaṇāyapi yebhuyyenānantariyakatāya jhānapakkhikabhāvato, yasmā bhavaṅgacittaṃ sabbapacchimaṃ, tato bhavato cavanato ‘‘cutī’’ti vuccati, tasmā na kevalaṃ ayameva bhagavā, atha kho sabbepi sattā bhavaṅgacitteneva cavantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye hi kecī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
220 没有与他相似的补特伽罗:因为他在戒等功德上无人可比,所以没有和他相似的人。巴利
220.Paṭibhāgapuggalavirahitoti sīlādiguṇehi asadisatāya sadisapuggalarahito.
221 诸行在这里寂止,所以叫“寂止”。涅槃就是这样被称呼、被认知、被言说的。巴利
221. Saṅkhārā vūpasamanti etthāti vūpasamoti evaṃsaṅkhātaṃ ñātaṃ kathitaṃ nibbānaṃ.
222 “Yanti”这个词是用于人的对格,所以经文说“谁作了时间”。巴利
222.Yanti paccatte upayogavacananti āha ‘‘yo kālaṃ akarī’’ti.
因为与喜和悦相应,所以是极其舒展、欢喜的。“他忍受了感受”,因为已经彻底了知,所以无有的生起已被造作。由于完全寂灭的状态,所以是无障碍解脱。巴利
Suvikasitenevāti pītisomanassayogato suṭṭhu vikasitena muditena. Vedanaṃ adhivāsesi abhāvasamudayo kato suṭṭhu pariññātattā. Anāvaraṇavimokkho sabbaso nibbutabhāvato.
223 223. 它们让自己的果以相同的方式呈现,所以叫“行相”,也就是诸因。“具足一切胜行相”的意思是:具备戒等功德这些最殊胜的因。巴利
223. Ākaronti attano phalāni samānākāre karontīti ākārā, kāraṇāni. Sabbākāravarūpeteti sabbehi ākāravarehi uttamakāraṇehi sīlādiguṇehi samannāgateti attho.
225 是什么样的?即是什么样子的?巴利
225.Kathaṃbhūtāti kīdisābhūtā.
小长时间:指很短的一段时间,大约两三个纳利卡那么久。巴利
Cullakaddhānanti parittaṃ kālaṃ dvattināḍikāmattaṃ velaṃ.
佛陀舍利供养的解说巴利
Buddhasarīrapūjāvaṇṇanā
227 铜钹之类的打击乐器属于这一类,所以称为“打击乐器类”,也就是蒙皮乐器等。因此说“一切乐器”。巴利
227. Kaṃsatāḷādi tāḷaṃ avacarati etthāti ‘‘tāḷāvacara’’nti vuccati ātatāditūriyabhaṇḍaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍa’’nti.
只从南方那一部分取,而不是从别的方向取来,也就是只从双娑罗树所在位置的南方那一部分取,再从那里取了南方那一部分带走。巴利
Dakkhiṇadisābhāgenevāti aññena disābhāgena anāharitvā yamakasālānaṃ ṭhānato dakkhiṇadisābhāgeneva, tatopi dakkhiṇadisābhāgaṃ haritvā netvā.
“像祇园一样”:是指在舍卫城里像祇园那样的地方;也有写成“在像祇园一样的地方”的读法。巴利
Jetavanasadiseti sāvatthiyā jetavanasadise ṭhāne, ‘‘jetavanasadise ṭhāne’’tipi pāṭho.
228 在灌顶仪式时,用作装饰的吉祥堂。巴利
228.Pasādhanamaṅgalasālāyāti abhisekakāle alaṅkaraṇamaṅgalasālāya.
229 提婆达尼耶是那个贼的名字。巴利
229.Devadāniyoti tassa corassa nāmaṃ.
大迦叶长老故事的注释巴利
Mahākassapattheravatthuvaṇṇanā
231 “从波婆城”:从波婆城。因为了知依赖于作意,而他当时没有作意,所以不知道世尊已经般涅槃。长老心想:“我要去见十力(世尊)”,或者在世尊的遗体上生起世尊想,就这样思惟。因此他说:“于是把世尊搁置一旁。”他以推测性的认知思惟:“他一定已经般涅槃了。”长老虽然知道,却还是问了那位活命外道;但在提问时,他自己就把其中的理由说明出来,于是开始了“那又怎样呢”等话。巴利
231.Pāvāyāti pāvā nagarato. Āvajjanapaṭibaddhattā jānanassa anāvajjitattā satthu parinibbānaṃ ajānanto ‘‘dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti thero cintesi, satthu sarīre vā satthusaññaṃ uppādento tathā cintesi. Tenevāha ‘‘atha bhagavantaṃ ukkhipitvā’’ti. ‘‘Dhuvaṃ parinibbuto bhavissatī’’ti cintesi pārisesañāyena. Jānantopi thero ājīvakaṃ pucchiyeva, pucchane pana kāraṇaṃ sayameva pakāsetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
今天从那天算起已经般涅槃七天了,意思是从今天往回数,在第七天般涅槃。巴利
Ajja sattāhaparinibbutoti ajja divasato paṭilomato sattame ahani parinibbuto.
232 用管子和袋子。巴利
232.Nāḷiyā vāpakenāti nāḷiyā ceva thavikāya ca.
「悦耳的」,是指说话动听、声音甜美。「具辩才」,是指有辩才。先食后饮之粥,是指先吃、然后再喝的粥。巴利
Mañjuketi mañjubhāṇine madhurassare. Paṭibhāneyyaketi paṭibhānavante. Bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgūti paṭhamaṃ bhuñjitvā pivitabbayāgu.
这里的“他的”,指的是苏跋陀,那位年老才出家的人。巴利
Tassāti subhaddassa vuḍḍhapabbajitassa.
“已奉行教法”指的是让教法妥善安立。“能”指有能力。“恶”指恶人。“令退减”意思是使之减损、消失。巴利
Ārādhitasāsaneti samāhitasāsane. Alanti samattho. Pāpoti pāpapuggalo. Osakkāpetunti hāpetuṃ antaradhāpetuṃ.
“问分”是指像问答一样的解说,比如“当欲界善心生起的时候”等等,以及“当为了投生色界而修习道的时候”等等,这些内容按一个或两个界来展开。所谓“根没了,我们就会像饿鬼一样”,意思是:就像住在树上的饿鬼,树枝周围都毁坏了,它就靠着树干住;树干毁坏了,它就靠着树根住;如果连树根也没了,它就完全没有依靠了。我们也会变成那样。另一种解释是:据说饿鬼会砍下某棵树的根,送给自己的孩子,只要那截根还没从孩子手里丢掉,他就能以看不见的样子在那片地方游荡;可一旦那截根因为被截断或因为忘记而丢失了,他就会以人能看见的样子游荡。针对这种情况,才说“根没了,我们就会像饿鬼一样”。巴利
Pañhavārāti pañhā viya vissajjanāni ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā, (dha. sa. 1.1) ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1.251) ca pavattāni ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni.Mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāmāti yathā rukkhe adhivattho pisāco tassa sākhāparivāre naṭṭhe khandhaṃ nissāya vasati, khandhe naṭṭhe mūlaṃ nissāya vasati, mūle pana naṭṭhe anissayova hoti, tathā bhavissāmāti attho. Atha vā mūle naṭṭheti pisācena kira rukkhagacchādīnaṃ kañcideva mūlaṃ chinditvā attano puttassa dinnaṃ, yāva taṃ tassa hatthato na vigacchati, tāva so taṃ padesaṃ adissamānarūpo vicarati. Yadā pana tasmiṃ kenaci acchinnabhāvena vā sativippavāsavasena vā naṭṭhe manussānampi dissamānarūpo vicarati, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāmā’’ti.
把我当作身证者,意思是:他以身体亲自证得了那条修行之道,因此把我当作那个教法的见证者。令其接受,这令其接受一事应当依据《迦叶经》来说明。巴利
Maṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvāti taṃ paṭipadaṃ kāyena sacchikatavantaṃ tasmā tassā desanāya sakkhibhūtaṃ maṃ katvā. Paṭicchāpesi taṃ paṭicchāpanaṃ kassapasuttena dīpetabbaṃ.
233 因为栴檀木块很多,所以堆成了栴檀柴堆。巴利
233. Candanaghaṭikābāhullato candanacitakā.
听了那番话,是指听了具寿阿那律长老所说的那些天神的意图。巴利
Taṃ sutvāti taṃ āyasmatā anuruddhattherena vuttaṃ devatānaṃ adhippāyaṃ sutvā.
234 或者,是像被缠裹过的、没有缝制的迦尸衣那样,哪怕只有一丝线那么大的布片。或者,是像栴檀等香木堆成的木堆。巴利
234.Dasikatantaṃ vāti paliveṭhitaahatakāsikavatthānaṃ dasaṭhānena tantumattampi vā. Dārukkhandhaṃ vāti candanādicitakadārukkhandhaṃ vā.
235 235. 因为整体上的惯用说法也可以用来指称它的各个部分,所以作为身体组成部分的骨头,就被说成是“诸身”。巴利
235. Samudāyesu pavattavohārānaṃ avayavesu dissanato sarīrassa avayavabhūtāni aṭṭhīni ‘‘sarīrānī’’ti vuttāni.
“没有散开”的意思是:它们保持原来的样子。说完“其余的散开了”之后,为了说明它们是怎样散开的,才接着说了“在那里”等话。巴利
Na vippakiriṃsūti sarūpeneva ṭhitāti attho. ‘‘Sesā vippakiriṃsū’’ti vatvā yathā pana tā vippakiṇṇā ahesuṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
水一流出来就把火浇灭了,这是靠天神的威力。有人问:为什么会有这么多股大水流呢?回答说:因为世尊的火葬堆很大。那火葬堆确实巨大,有二十丈宽。所谓“八齿犁”,就是指犁具,这些犁正好有八块像牙齿一样的木板,所以叫做“八齿犁”。巴利
Udakadhārā nikkhamitvā nibbāpesunti devatānubhāvena. Evaṃ mahatiyo bahū udakadhārā kimatthāyāti āha ‘‘bhagavato citako mahanto’’ti. Mahā hi so vīsaratanasatiko. Aṭṭhadantakehīti naṅgalehi aṭṭheva hi nesaṃ dantasadisāni potthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘aṭṭhadantakānī’’ti vuccati.
“以法谈为衡量标准”这句话的意思是:因为这件事极其稀有、不可思议,让看到和听到的人都生起格外强烈的信心,也特别显示出佛陀的威神之力。已般涅槃的佛陀世尊,确实有这样的威神事迹。当说法的人讲述这件事迹时,随顺自己智慧能力而展开的法谈,在这里就是衡量标准;因为所要讲述的内容范围极为广大,所以这属于注释的范畴。“令人制作四种香料的涂饰”:就是把零陵香、藏红花、亚瓦那花和塔玛拉叶磨碎,用调好的香料涂饰地面。“悬挂”:就是在各处垂挂布置。拿香料做成花环叫香鬘,用宝珠串成叫宝鬘。“令人制作外竹篱和内布幔围栏”:就是做成布幔与竹篱的围栏。能兜风的旗幡叫风幡。以獐子形做床脚的床座叫獐子床座,就在那獐子床座上。巴利
Dhammakathāvapamāṇanti ativiya acchariyabbhutabhāvato passantānaṃ, suṇantānañca sātisayaṃ pasādāvahabhāvato, savisesaṃ buddhānubhāvadīpanato. Parinibbutassa hi buddhassa bhagavato evarūpo ānubhāvoti taṃ pavattiṃ kathentānaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ attano ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ pavattiyamānā dhammakathā evettha pamāṇaṃ vaṇṇetabbassa atthassa mahāvisayattā, tasmā vaṇṇanābhūmi nāmesāti adhippāyo. Catujjātiyagandhaparibhaṇḍaṃ kāretvāti tagarakuṅkumayavanapupphatamālapattāni pisitvā katagandhena paribhaṇḍaṃ kāretvā. Khacitvāti tattha tattha olambanavasena racetvā, gandhavatthūni gahetvā ganthitamālā gandhadāmāni ratanāvaḷiyo ratanadāmāni. Bahikilañjaparikkhepassa, antosāṇiparikkhepassa karaṇena sāṇikilañjaparikkhepaṃ kāretvā. Vātaggāhiniyo paṭākā vātapaṭākā. Sarabharūpapādako pallaṅko sarabhamayapallaṅko, tasmiṃ sarabhamayapallaṅke.
手持矛的男子们,因为矛与他们形影不离,就像说“矛在四处走动”一样,所以让他们从四面八方守护,这叫五重防护。因此说“让手持矛的男子们围住”。说到“持弓”也是同样的道理。就像做成铠甲网一样,以毫无间隙、严密周遍的守护之铠,做成像网一样的防护。巴利
Sattihatthā purisā sattiyo taṃsahacaraṇato yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti, tehi samantato rakkhāpanaṃ pañcakaraṇanti āha ‘‘sattihatthehi purisehi parikkhipāpetvā’’ti. Dhanūhīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sannāhagavacchikaṃviya katvā nirantarāvaṭṭhitaārakkhasannāhena gavacchijālaṃ viya katvā.
“善妙之戏”是指:因为能成就自他的利益,所以叫“善”;他们的嬉戏能涌出广大的福德,是与来世利益不相违背的游戏生活,这就是它的含义。巴利
Sādhukīḷitanti saparahitaṃ sādhanaṭṭhena sādhū, tesaṃ kīḷitaṃ uḷārapuññapasavanato, samparāyikatthāvirodhikaṃ kīḷāvihāranti attho.
舍利分配注释巴利
Sarīradhātuvibhajanavaṇṇanā
236 就用这个方式:像坐在大殿上,不做任何回避,纯粹只靠这个方式。恶梦:就是不好的梦。穿上双层细布下衣:把两块细布衣料叠在一起穿上。因为这样穿着,即使悲痛至极,衣物也不会滑落,还能保持原样。巴利
236.Imināva niyāmenāti yena nīhārena mahātale nisinno kañci parihāraṃ akatvā kevalaṃ iminā niyāmeneva. Supinakoti dussupinako. Dukūladupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvāti dve dukūlavatthāni ekajjhaṃ katvā nivāsetvā. Evañhi tāni sokasamappitassāpi abhassitvā tiṭṭhanti.
灌顶洒水者:在国王即位灌顶的仪式中负责洒水行吉祥礼的人,因为这是最上等的吉祥。他昏了过去:就像那样——由于深切体会到世尊殊胜功德的滋味,他的爱敬之情始终安住不退;依凡夫之信而建立的净信已经稳固;又因为曾蒙受恩德,内心变得柔软。巴利
Abhisekasiñcakoti rajjābhiseke abhisekamaṅgalasiñcako uttamamaṅgalabhāvato. Visaññī jāto yathā taṃ bhagavato guṇavisesāmatarasaññutāya avaṭṭhitapemo pothujjanikasaddhāya patiṭṭhitapasādo katūpakāratāya sañjanitacittamaddavo.
就像用纯金铸造的靠垫那样的色泽,也就是精心制作的靠垫那样。巴利
Suvaṇṇabimbisakavaṇṇanti suviracita apassenasadisaṃ.
那么,为什么在这里巴利圣典把巴瓦人放在最后呢?难道他们虽然离拘尸那罗更近,却也是最后才出发的吗?是的,为了表明他们是在最后出发的,才说了“在那里,巴瓦人……”等话。巴利
Kasmā panettha pāveyyakā pāḷiyaṃ sabbapacchato gahitā, kiṃ te kusinārāya āsannatarāpi sabbapacchato uṭṭhitā? Āma, sabbapacchato uṭṭhitāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha pāveyyakā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
为了供奉导师的舍利。“供奉舍利”的意思,就是为了侍奉导师的舍利。他们那些人起了这样的主张:“按照道理,这些舍利应该属于我们。”巴利
Dhātupāsanatthanti satthu dhātūnaṃ payirupāsanāya. Nesaṃ pakkhā ahesuṃ ‘‘ñāyena tesaṃ santakā dhātuyo’’ti.
237 名为“度那之吼”的这段宣说,讲的是与世尊相关的三个阶段的事。正是为了这个目的,世尊在赶路时决意:“从后面跟来的度那婆罗门,只要还能看见我的足迹,就让这足迹不消失。”于是世尊在一棵树下坐了下来。度那婆罗门也看出:“这些是包括天界在内的整个世间中最高贵者的足迹”,便顺着足迹来到导师跟前。导师为他说法,他因此对世尊生起了坚定的信心,随即说了这番话。他说了什么呢?说的是:“请听……等等……说了。”巴利
237.Doṇagajjitaṃ nāma avoca satthu avatthattayūpasaṃhitaṃ. Etadatthameva hi bhagavā maggaṃ gacchanto ‘‘pacchato āgacchanto doṇo brāhmaṇo yāva me padavaḷañjaṃ passati, tāva mā vigacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāya aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi. Doṇopi kho brāhmaṇo ‘‘imāni sadevake loke aggapuggalassa padānī’’ti sallakkhento padānusārena satthu santikaṃ upagacchi, satthāpissa dhammaṃ desesi, tenapi so bhagavati niviṭṭhasaddho ahosi. Etadavoca, kiṃ avocāti āha ‘‘suṇantu…pe… avocā’’ti.
大家要以身体聚在一起,以言语说同样的话,不说不同的话,这样和合共住。接着说明这样做的原因,所以说“彼此欢喜”。因此说:“也要以心彼此欢喜。”巴利
Kāyena ekasannipātā vācāya ekavacanā abhinnavacanā evaṃ samaggā hotha. Tassa panidaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘sammodamānā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘cittenāpi aññamaññaṃ sammodamānā hothā’’ti.
238 从各处聚集而来的僧团:从各自的住处来到一处,聚在一起,因此成为聚集而来的僧团。同样地,以聚集为群体的状态,成为聚集而来的大众。通过接受话语而应允。巴利
238.Tato tato samāgatasaṅghānanti tato tato attano vasanaṭṭhānato samāgantvā sannipatitabhāvena samāgatasaṅghānaṃ. Tathā samāpatitasamūhabhāvena samāgatagaṇānaṃ. Vacanasampaṭicchanena paṭissuṇitvā.
舍利塔供养的详细解释巴利
Dhātuthūpapūjāvaṇṇanā
239 夜叉执就是天神附体。喷嚏病是指由界扰动所引发的喷嚏病。不喜食病就是对食物不悦的病。巴利
239.Yakkhaggāho devatāveso. Khipitakaṃ dhātukkhobhaṃ uppādetvā khipitakarogo. Arocako āhārassa aruccanarogo.
在第七天,也就是从七年七个月之后再往后的第七天。随力相应,就是与财富之力相应。巴利
Sattamadivaseti sattavassasattamāsato parato sattame divase. Balānurūpenāti vibhavabalānurūpena.
后来结集的人,就是第二次和第三次结集的人。看见舍利的障碍之后:是说看到安放在各处塔庙里的舍利,虽然按原样安住着,却会因为邪见者而遭遇障碍;同时也预见到,用大舍利埋藏把它们妥善保护起来之后,未来阿育王会从那里取出并广布流传,能给包括天神在内的世间带来利益和安乐。仅仅是照料:意思是取走之后,只留下那些可以被照料的舍利,把它们交到国王们手中,而不是放在塔庙里。正因如此,后来阿育王在塔庙中得不到舍利。巴利
Pacchā saṅgītikārakāti dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ saṅgītikārakā. Dhātūnaṃ antarāyaṃ disvāti tattha tattha cetiye yathāpatiṭṭhāpitabhāveneva ṭhitānaṃ dhātūnaṃ micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vasena antarāyaṃ disvā, mahādhātunidhānena sammadeva rakkhitānaṃ anāgate asokena dhammaraññā tato uddharitvā vitthāritabhāve kate sadevakassa lokassa hitasukhāvahabhāvañca disvāti adhippāyo. Paricaraṇamattamevāti gahetvā paricaritabbadhātumattameva. Rājūnaṃ hatthe ṭhapetvā, na cetiyesu. Tathā hi pacchā asokamahārājā cetiyesu dhātūnaṃ na labhati.
他每做一批新的,就让它能够容纳先前所做的那一批,就这样让人造了八座又八座用栴檀香木等材料做成的匣子和塔。用红栴檀等材料来做,也是同样的做法。所谓“宝匣中”,是指除了红宝石、肉色宝珠、宝石、水晶所制成的匣子以外,其余各种用宝珠装饰的匣子。巴利
Purimaṃ purimaṃ katassa gaṇhanayogyaṃ pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ kārento aṭṭha aṭṭha haricandanādimaye karaṇḍe ca thūpe ca kāresi. Lohitacandanamayādīsupi eseva nayo. Maṇikaraṇḍesūti lohitaṅkamasāragallaphalikamaye ṭhapetvā avasesamaṇivicittakesu karaṇḍesu.
塔庙园塔庙的尺寸,是指天爱帝须大王所建塔庙的尺寸。巴利
Thūpārāmacetiyappamāṇanti devānaṃpiyatissamahārājena kāritacetiyappamāṇaṃ.
“花鬘不要枯萎”:他这样决意:“直到无忧法王为了在外面建造塔庙而从这里取出舍利为止,花鬘都不要枯萎。” “拉门闩的绳子”:就是门闩拉环上的绳子。“钥匙和印封”:为了开门用的钥匙和印封。巴利
Mālā mā milāyantūti ‘‘yāva asoko dhammarājā bahi cetiyāni kāretuṃ ito dhātuyo uddharissati, tāva mālā mā milāyantū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā. Āviñchanarajjuyanti aggaḷāviñchanarajjuyaṃ. Kuñcikamuddikanti dvāravivaraṇatthaṃ kuñcikañceva muddikañca.
“猛兽机关”是指一个像炽热灰烬堆一样令人恐惧的机关。因为各部分互相牵连、彼此联动,所以做成了组合起来的形象机关。因此经文说“木制形象”等等。“用楔子绑好之后”:毗首羯磨凭自己的天界神力,只用一根楔子就把由许多木制形象装饰成的精巧机关固定好,然后回到了天界。至于“从四周”等话,是为了显示在那次舍利埋藏的事上,阿阇世王所完成的特殊功业。巴利
Vāḷasaṅghātayantanti kukkulaṃ paṭibhayadassanaṃ aññamaññapaṭibaddhagamanāditāya saṅghāṭitarūpakayantaṃ yojesi. Tenāha ‘‘kaṭṭharūpakānī’’tiādi. Āṇiyā bandhitvāti anekakaṭṭharūpavicittayantaṃ attano devānubhāvena ekāya eva āṇiyā bandhitvā vissakammo devalokameva gato. ‘‘Samantato’’tiādi pana tasmiṃ dhātunidāne ajātasattuno kiccavisesānuṭṭhānadassanaṃ.
国王问“某某地方到底是不是埋舍利的地方”时,有些人说:“在那次集会里,并没有证得胜法的人。”另一些人说:“他们把自己藏了起来,如果依靠那位年长者的说法去探究,就能知道,所以才不说。”“夜叉仆”是指用献供等方式让天神附体的人,也就是被鬼怪操控的人。巴利
‘‘Asukaṭṭhāne nāma dhātunidhāna’’nti raññā pucchite ‘‘tasmiṃ sannipāte visesalābhino nāhesu’’nti keci. ‘‘Attānaṃ nigūhitvā tassa vuḍḍhatarassa vacanaṃ nissāya vīmaṃsanto jānissatīti na kathesu’’nti apare. Yakkhadāsaketi upahārādividhinā devatāvesanake bhūtāviggāhake.
“这句话”是指第二次结集的老师们安立的“事情过去确实是这样”这一句。第三次结集的老师们也将大舍利埋藏作为它的释义之后,把它保留了下来。巴利
Imaṃpadanti ‘‘evametaṃ bhūtapubba’’nti dutiyasaṅgītikārehi ṭhapitaṃ imaṃ padaṃ. Mahādhātunidhānampi tassa atthaṃ katvā tatiyasaṅgītikārāpi ṭhapayiṃsu.